Strata CTX Programming Manual

726+,%$
Digital Solutions Division
Digital Business Telephone Systems
CTX28, CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670
Programming Manual
June 2004

Strata CTX100 and CTX670
you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact
your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling
General End User Information
area.
3. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
The Strata CTX100 or CTX670 Digital Business Telephone System is registered in
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items
accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
Commission's Rules and Regulations.
4. Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M,
FCC Requirements
04DU9-BN/DN/1SN, 02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
Radio Frequency Interference
established rules which permit the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system to be connected
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may
company--connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
interference.
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
U
log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/locator.htm or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
ä L
Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
Important Notice -- Music-On-Hold
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
compatibility or use of the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system, the telephone company
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
service.
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CTX100 or CTX670
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
1. Your telephone number.
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
2. FCC registration number:
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
· Strata CTX100 or CTX670 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent
the Equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
upon your operation of the system.
· If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
be registered as a Key telephone system.
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
· If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
service in some situations.
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
telephone system registration in some areas.
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
· If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
the user to disconnect the equipment.
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
for assistance.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
CTX28 FCC/ACTA Registration Numbers
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
Hybrid: CJ6MF03BDTCHS28, fully-protected multifunction systems
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Key: CJ6KD03BDTCHS28, key systems for analog applications
CTX100 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
Key: CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
electrician, as appropriate.
CTX670 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35934-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35933-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Key: CJ6MUL-35932-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
· Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to
one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices
Publication Information
© Copyright 2004
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Digital Solutions Division, reserves the
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason,
Digital Solutions Division
including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or
to simply change the design of this document.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means--graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Digital Solutions Division, also
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems--without
reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant.
Strata and SmartMedia are registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
CTX-MA-PRGRM-VG
Version G, June 2004

TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. ("TAIS")
Digital Solutions Division License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU ("YOU") AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, "SOFTWARE") INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS DIGITAL SOLUTIONS PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE AVAILABLE TO
YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE SUPPLIER. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR DISTRIBUTION ONLY
TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software
provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying,
distributing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the Software is strictly
prohibited; You agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice, against You or any other person in possession of the Software.
You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not
to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the software in the event that You or any other person violates this License
Agreement.
2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain
the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices
contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the
software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes
a willful infringement of copyright.
3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from
attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein
will result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.
4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO
YOU.
5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS' ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS' OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.
6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.
7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or
order, is prohibited.
8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.
9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government, its agencies and/or instrumentalities is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (October 1988) or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way
be affected or impaired.
11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no
waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Digital Solutions Division
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America
5932
DSD 060204

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Digital Solutions Division
Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., ("TAIS") warrants that this telephone equipment (except for fuses,
lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in new
condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24) months after delivery. This
warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if the
equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the
equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by
someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment's serial number is defaced or missing, or
(f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which
are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with
respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized dealer of such defective or missing
parts as are causing the malfunction with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized
dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer's sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by
TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its
authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever
first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special,
indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will
any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is
malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention
of one of TAIS' authorized dealers within the twenty-four (24) month period and no later than thirty (30) days after
such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS
dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service.
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS,
INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE
EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such
modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the vice president and general manager,
Digital Solutions Division.

Introduction
This manual provides information required to program the Strata CTX28, CTX100-S, CTX100
and CTX670 business telephone systems using Toshiba's CTX WinAdminTM software or Button
Programming.
Important!
Whenever the CTX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CTX100-S
and CTX100, unless specified otherwise.
This programming manual only applies to CTX WinAdmin version 2.20G. If you
have CTX WinAdmin versions 2.1D or lower, refer to previous versions of this
manual.
Note The features described in this document assume that the Strata CTX system has the current
software release installed. At the time of printing, Strata CTX R2.2 and CTX WinAdmin
R2.20 are the most current versions.
Organization
Part 1: Getting Started
Chapter 1 - Programming Guidelines describes auto-recognition features, order of
programming, and overview of general CTX WinAdmin and Button Programming operation.
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
Chapter 2 CTX WinAdmin Overview provides general information about CTX WinAdmin's
software capabilities.
Chapter 3 Installation discusses system hardware and software requirements for
CTX WinAdmin and includes the installation steps needed to install CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 4 System provides system programming information.
Chapter 5 Station discusses station and station feature programming.
Chapter 6 Trunks explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Chapter 7 Attendant describes Attendant Console support and settings available in
CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 8 IP Telephone describes the programs required to program IP Telephone features.
Strata CTX Programming 6/04
xi

Introduction
Organization
Chapter 9 Services discusses programming of services available to Strata CTX through
CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 10 Operation explains system setup options available to CTX WinAdmin users.
System initialization, SmartMedia formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol (IP)
configuration are among the topics discussed.
Chapter 11 Maintenance provides system and component trace program information.
CTX WinAdmin Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
Chapter 12 Tools and Profile discusses Strata CTX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CTX System more efficiently.
Part 3: Telephone Button Programming
Chapter 13 Telephone Button Programming discusses the button programming interface
provided with Strata CTX.
Chapter 14 Maintenance Procedures provides Strata CTX maintenance procedures that can be
activated from the programming telephone.
Part 4: Appendices
Appendix A Applications, Tips and Tricks gives information on using multiple programs to
set up a feature.
Appendix B System Error Codes is a reference for error codes encountered while
programming the Strata CTX.
Appendix C Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference provides cross-reference tables that
compare Strata CTX and Strata DK programs that are similar in function.
Appendix D Record Sheets contains all the record sheets required to program the Strata CTX.
Appendix E Software and Firmware Updates contains IP Telephone and BIPU Firmware
update procedures.
xii
Strata CTX Programming 6/04

Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
Conventions
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
Note
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply
to specific items.
Important!
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
CAUTION!
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING!
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension
[DN]
or intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
[PDN]
number for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears
[SDN]
on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN]
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
6vhyÃ7yq
Represents telephone buttons.
Courier
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
"Type"
Indicates entry of a string of text.
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press
"Press"
Enter.
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:
Plus (+)
Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential
entry.
Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~)
Means "through." Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.
¥
Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.
¥
Denotes a procedure.
Start > Settings >
Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you
Printers
should select.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
See Figure 10
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Strata CTX Programming 6/04
xiii

Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print.
To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on
the back of the document's title page.
General Description
·
Strata CTX General Description
Installation and Maintenance Manual
·
Strata CTX Installation and Maintenance
User Guides
·
Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
·
Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
·
Strata CTX Standard Telephone
·
Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephone
Quick Reference Guide
·
Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
CD-ROMs
·
Strata CTX WinAdmin Application Software and CTX/DK/Partner Products Documentation
Library
·
Strata CTX Call Center Solutions Application Software and Documentation Library (includes
Strata CTX ACD software and documentation, Net Server software and documentation, and
Voice Assistant software and documentation.
·
OAISYS (includes software and documentation of OAISYS Chat, Call Router, and Net Phone)
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CTX
documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.
xiv
Strata CTX Programming 6/04

726+,%$
Digital Solutions Division
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Part 1: Getting Started
June 2004

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
1 Pr Stogrraamta CTX ming
This chapter discusses Strata CTX programming basics and guides you through initial setup procedures. It
also describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CTX WinAdmin
and Button Programming operations. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline your
programming tasks.
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to
Start Up
Important!
Defaults for the Strata CTX28 are also included in this chapter. All programs and
instructions apply to all Strata CTX systems, except when specified otherwise.
This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CTX systems. The Strata CTX system will
automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that are installed
in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for auto-programming is
provided in this section.
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify "Station and BIOU Auto-programming" on page 1-2.
4. Verify "Station PDN Auto-programming" on page 1-3.
5. Verify "CO Line Auto-programming" on page 1-3.
6. Verify "CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming" on page 1-8.
Notes
·
The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system initialization;
or, when powering the CTX processor for the first time.
·
Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet and slot
position of the PCB.
·
Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order according
to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.
·
Other default data, such as the Strata CTX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and line class
of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc., are automatically set for the optional hardware
originally installed.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-1

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CTX auto-programming.
·
CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
·
Strata CTX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CTX's LAN system data,
CTX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.
·
When the system is initialized, it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
·
The Primary DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons; all other
buttons are not assigned automatically.
·
Slot 101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The BDKU is assigned if no PCB is installed.
Station and BIOU Auto-programming
Table 1-1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU during auto-programming.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CTX I&M manual, Configuration Chapter,
Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 1-1
Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)
Parameter
PCB Code
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Comments
Setting
000
No PCB or RRCU
None or Remote Cabinets
8 Standard Telephone
Standard telephone no VM interface
002
RSTU
circuits
settings
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA (DKT3000 limitations:
PCM
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display
003
PDKU2 8
Digital
Telephone
Highway: 8
on DKT3000, DKT3000 LCD Feature
key does not function, DKT3014
large screen LCD does not display).
004
Not used
Not used
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
017
BDKU
8 digital telephones
8, 1B circuits
S-OCA
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
018
BDKU1+BDKS
16 digital telephones
16, 1B circuits S-OCA
Page/MOH/Relay
019
BIOU
No functions assigned
interface#1
No functions assigned. Strata CTX
Page/MOH/Relay
100 assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a
020
BIOU2
interface#2
virtual location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05,
to provide control of the ACTU relay.
1-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Station PDN Auto-programming
Pr
When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs, it assigns PDNs in numerical order as follows:
St
ogr
ra
·
Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in
am
ta
equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless of the
CTX
m
circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU).
ing
·
PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having the
lowest equipment number in the system, then the PDN is incremented by one digit and assigned to the
next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 1-2.
·
Program 205 Feature Button Setting A Primary DN (PDN) is assigned to )% on each digital
telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned to FB20
on 20-button telephones and is not assigned on 10- and 14-button telephones.
Table 1-2
Auto-Programming for Station Primary Directory Number
CTX100 and CTX670 without BBMS
CTX670 with BBMS and BEXS
First digit
and BEXS Installed on Processor
Installed on Processor (First Digit is 2)
Primary DNs (3-digits)
Primary DNs (4-digit)
2
200~299 depending on quantity of station 2000~2571 depending on qty. of station PCBs
PCBs installed
installed
Primary DN (3-digits)
3
300~399 depending on qty. of station
PCBs installed
CO Line Auto-programming
Table 1-3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups (OLG),
and CO line service type is set as shown in Table 1-4.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the CTX I&M manual, Configuration Chapter,
Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 1-3
Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Parameter setting
Comments
Code
000
-
No PCB or RRCU
None or Remote cabinets
4 analog Loop or
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
001
RCOU, RGLU
ground start lines
lines
8 analog loop start
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
005
RCOU+RCOS
lines
lines
006
RDDU
4 analog DID lines
Direct Inward Dial lines
16 or 24 digital T1
PCM Highway:
T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
007
RDTU2
lines
16 or 241
lines
Standard telephone and DKT2000
and DKT3000 without S-OCA
4 Standard telephone
(DKT3000 limitations: DKT2000, 16
008
RDSU
and for digital
character LCD display on DKT3000,
telephone
DKT3000 LCD Feature key does not
function, DKT3014 large screen LCD
does not display).
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-3

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-3
Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100) (continued)
PCB
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Parameter setting
Comments
Code
Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS
4 or 8 Caller ID
and RGLU analog CLID lines. Note:
009
RCIU2+RCIS
interface
The same Prg100 code (009) is used
for RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
CAMA lines Note: The same Prg100
2 or 4 E911 analog
010
RMCU+RCMS
code (009) used for RCIU2 with or
CAMA lines
without RCIS.
4 analog Tie lines, 4
011
REMU, BVPU
Tie lines
VoIP circuits
2 ISDN BRI (S/T)
TIE Type:
012
RBSU
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
4 ISDN BRI (S/T)
TEI Type:
013
RBSU+RBSS
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
16 or 24 ISDN PRI
PCM Highway:
014
RPTU
ISDN BRI CO lines
channels
16 or 241
2 ISDN BRI (U)
TEI Type:
015
RBUU
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
4 ISDN BRI (U)
TEI Type:
016
RBUU+RBUS
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
1. If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 line or channels will be installed; If the slot next to
an installed RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.
Table 1-4
Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types
OLG
ILG
CO line type
CO Service Type
Prg 306
Prg. 304
RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog loop
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
1
1
and ground start
(200 or 2000 see Table 5)
RDDU analog DID
1
2
DID, wink no default DID numbers
RDTU (T1)
1
3
DID no default DID numbers
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA
1
-
(200 or 2000 see next table)
RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI -
2
4
DID no default DID numbers
set as CO side
ISDN PRI
2
5
DID no default DID numbers
REMU analog E&M
3
6
Non-QSIG
1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements.
Example: Line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.
1-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-5
Auto-Programming of Miscellaneous Line Parameters
Pr
Item
Settings
St
ogr
r
All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
a
am
t
DIT line ringing assignment
a CTX
PDN 200 for CTX100 and 2-cabinet CTX670
m
Program 310
ing
PDN2000 for 2~7 cabinet CTX670.
DID numbers - not assigned.
The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing
destinations must be assigned manually from CTX WinAdmin or the
Program 309
programming telephone.
Format Setting for DIT (T1)
Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF.
The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all
Setting for CAMA
operation mode (DAY1, Day2, and Night).
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
Setting for ISDN BRI CO
BRI interface in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
Setting for ISDN PRI CO
PRI interface in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned
Setting for E&M Tie lines
automatically
The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number and Out Of Search for DID number, is assigned
to the first Primary DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes (Day1,Day 2, and
Night).
The DIT line (ground and loop) destinations of all trunks which generated automatically are set as the first
PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size see Table 1-4.
BIPU Settings
Table 1-6
BIPU-M Automatic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
Card Type
Card Type
BIPU
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200
IP Address (BIPU)
IP address of BIPU
.201
.202/.......
Private address will be set.
Subnet mask of BIPU
Subnet mask (BIPU)
255.255.255.0
substrate
Default gateway of BIPU
Default gateway
0.0.0.0
substrate
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-5

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-7
IPT Automatic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
The number plan conforms to BDKU16.
DN setting of the terminal
DN Setting
accommodated in BIPU
Assigned in the order of the lowest slot
number.
Accommodated terminal setting
Parameter setting of Station
Station ID = PDN
(Station ID)
ID in BIPU
Accommodated terminal setting
Parameter setting of IP
IP address = 0.0.0.0
(IP Address)
address in BIPU
Accommodated terminal setting
Parameter setting of MAC
MAC addresses = (no data)
(MAC addresses)
addresses in BIPU
Table 1-8
System Related Basic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
Use of Diffserv: Not applicable
Setting of priority control by
Set value of DSField = 0
QOS Control
Diffserv/IEEE802.1p
Use of IEEE802.1p: Not applicable
Priority level: Voice
Automatic setting of Station
Station ID
Not allowed
ID
Application or non application
Terminal authentication setting
of connection restriction
Not apply
function using MAC address
BIPU-Q1A Initial Programming
After initializing the CTX System with BIPU for Strata Net over IP, Strata CTX detects the BIPU card for
Strata Net over IP and basic programming is set automatically.
Table 1-9
BIPU-Q1A Automatic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
Card Type
Card Type
BIPU-Q1A
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.800 for 1st BIPU
IP Address (BIPU)
IP address of BIPU-Q1A
.801 for 2nd BIPU
.802 for 3rd BIPU
Private address will be set.
Subnet mask (BIPU)
Subnet mask of BIPU-Q1A
255.255.255.0
Default gateway
Default gateway of BIPU-Q1A 0.0.0.0
1-6
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-10
IP-Trunk Information
Pr
Program
Description
Settings
St
ogr
r
ILG Number
7
a
am
ta
ILG
Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN)
ISDN
CTX
mi
Type of Trunk
TIE
ng
OLG Number
4
OLG
Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN)
ISDN
Type of Trunk
TIE
1: 1st BIPU
CG Number
2: 2nd BIPU
3: 3rd BIPU
ISDN Trunk
Type of Protocol
IP
ILG
7
OLG
4
Voice Coding Procedure
CODEC (G.711, G.729A)
G.711
Index of Voice attribute table
(1~256)
1
Packet Interval: 20ms
Type of Jitter buffer: Fixed
Size of Jitter buffer: 1
Parameter of voice attribute table
-
Max Acceptable Delay: 1
Measure Time: 1000ms
Packet Loss Ratio: 5
Packet discard ratio: 5
D-ch Establish/Release
D-ch Establish/Release
D-ch Release by Call Released
Fast Connect Procedure
-
Apply
Negotiation
Negotiation of H.245
Un-Apply
IP address for Node ID
IP Address
IP address
Table 1-11
System Information
Item
Description
Settings
Diffserv: Disable
Priority Control by Diffserv.
DS Field: 0
QoS Control
IEEE802.1p
IEEE802.1p Disable
Priority: Voice (6)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-7

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming
The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.
·
Network TCP/IP. See "916 IP Configuration" on page 10-14.
·
IP address 192.168.254.253
·
Sub network master 255.255.255.0
·
Default gateway 0.0.0.0
·
IP routing table Not used.
·
SNMP Agent settings
·
Community name communityName
·
IP address 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
·
Privileges WRITE
·
community-id 1
· User level Super user
·
Trap destination
·
Community name Nothing
·
IP address Nothing
·
Modem PPP Server settings
·
IP Address 192.168.255.254 (Strata CTX modem fixed IP address for Dial-up connections).
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)
Public Numbering Plan
Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Number
Analyzed Digit Number
1NXX
11
N11
3
NXX
7
N = 2~9 and X = 0~9
E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)
Emergency Call Group
OLG1
Number
1
1
E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)
Emergency Call Called Number
System Mode
Emergency Call Called Number
Index
DAY1
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
DAY2
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
NIGHT
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1,
Day2, NIGHT).
1-8
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
CTX28 Default Initialized Data
Pr
·
The default programming data shown in Table 1-12 applies even if the option units (GCDU/GSTU/
St
ogr
GVMU) are not mounted. This enables voice mail to be used as is if the GVMU is inserted. Default
ra
am
t
programming accommodates the other options similarly.
a CTX
m
·
When GCDU is not installed, CO 4-6 and DKTs 9-16 are in "make-busy" mode and cannot be used.
ing
·
When GSTU is not installed, SLT2 is not in "make busy" mode and cannot be used.
·
When GVMU is not installed, VM ports1-4 are in "make busy" mode and cannot be used.
Table 1-12
CTX28 Digital Telephone Default Programming Data Program 205
DKT1~8
DKT1
DKT2
DKT3
DKT4
DKT5
DKT6
DKT7
DKT8
FB7
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
FB6
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
FB5
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
FB4
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
FB3
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
FB2
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
FB1
PDN
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
VMID
same as PDN
DKT9~16 (Optional)
DKT9
DKT10
DKT11
DKT12
DKT13
DKT14
DKT15
DKT16
FB7
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
CO6
FB6
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
CO5
FB5
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
CO4
FB4
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
CO3
FB3
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
FB2
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
CO1
FB1
PDN
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
VMID
same as PDN
Table 1-13
Program 204 Default Data
In Program 204, all telephones are programmed as 20 buttons.
Table 1-14
Program 102 New Default Data
Feature
Default Value
Function
Code
870
#963
Call Monitor Log Off
Table 1-15
Program 205/213/215 New Default Data
Button Code
Function
870
Call Monitor Feature Button
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-9

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-16
Program 313 Default Data
Caller
Prog 313
Function
CTX28 default
ID
nothing/ANI-MCI/ANI-Sprint/
FB1
Caller ID Receive Method
CLASS
CLASS
Caller ID Identification
FB2
ANI and DNIS/DNIS/DID
ANI or DNIS
Notice Contents
under line is CTX100's default
Note
Class Equipment number is not required for CTX28 because CLID circuits are built-in and
dedicated to each CO line.
Table 1-17
Program 100 Default Data
Virtual Slot
PCB
Station Line
Circuits
Connection
Equip. Nos.
Code
Numbers
0101
8 - Digital Telephones (no spkr OCA)
017
200~207
GMAU1A
0102
3 - CO lines, with CLID
028
CO1~CO3
(motherboard)
0103
Not used
01~208
01-GMAU1A
0104
Standard Telephone 01~02
026
02~217
02-GSTU1A
026
0105
4 - Voice Mail ports
220~223
GVMU1A
0106
Not used
0107
8 - Digital Telephones
017
209~216
GCDU1A
0108
3 - CO Lines with CLID
028
CO4~CO6
Relay Contact
0205
Virtual BIOU
020
GCTU1A
Page, MOH
*Slot codes are set during system initialization and cannot be changed.
Table 1-18
Program 200 Default Data
GMAU
FB0
DN
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
FB1
EQUIP
010101
010102
010103
010104
010105
010106
010107
010108
010401
FB2
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
SLT
FB3
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
FB19
VM ID
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
FB22
VM MW
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
Center Port
Table 1-19
Prog 200 Default Data
GCDU
GSTU
FB0
DN
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
FB1
EQUIP
010701
010702
010703
010704
010705
010706
010707
010708
010402
FB2
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
DKT
SLT
FB3
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
Ext.
FB19
VM ID
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
FB22
VM MW
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
Center Port
Note To log into GVMU boxes for the first time, enter the default telephone station number plus 997.
Example: for Station 200, enter 200997 as the Voice Mail ID.
1-10
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-20
Prog 200 Default Data for GVMU
Pr
St
ogr
GVMU
ra
am
ta
FB0
DN
220
221
222
223
CTX
m
FB1
EQUIP
010501
010502
010503
010504
ing
FB2
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
FB3
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
FB19
VM ID
FB22
VM MW
Center Port
Table 1-21
Prog 579 Default Data
FB16
VM DN
220
Table 1-22
Prog 580 Voice Mail Data Assignment Default Data for GVMU
FB0
DN 220
221
222
223
INBAND /
FB1
SMDI
SMDI
SMDI
SMDI
SMDI
Note
In Program 209, the above Voice Mail ports are assigned to Hunt Group 01 (circular).
Table 1-23
Prog 218 Voice Mail Hunt Group Assignment Default Data
FB0
G
RP
1
1
1
1
FB1
INDEX
1
2
3
4
FB2
DN
220
221
222
223
Note
VM ports are assigned to Hunt Group 1 (circular) in Prog. 209 in default data.
Table 1-24
Prog 300 Default Data
FB
0
TRK NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
FB1
EQUIP
010201
010202
010203
010801
010802
010803
FB2
ILG
1
1
1
1
1
1
FB3
OLG
1
1
1
1
1
1
FB4
DTMF
DTMF
DTMF
DTMF
DTMF
DTMF
FB5
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
FB12
HUNT ORDER
6
5
4
3
2
1
Table 1-25
Prog 310 Default Data (Trunk > Assignment > DIT)
FB0

Trunk Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
FB0
EQUIP
010201
010202
010203
010801
010802
010803
FB1
Day 1 Destination
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
FB2
Day 2 Destination
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
FB3
Day 3 Destination
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
Music on Hold
Processor
Processor
Processor
Processor
Processor
Processor
FB4
Source
MOH Jack
MOH Jack
MOH Jack
MOH Jack
MOH Jack
MOH Jack
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-11

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Default Feature Access Codes
Refer to "102 Flexible Access Codes" on page 4-4.
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Plan for your Strata CTX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. Use record
sheets wherever they are provided to document your installation requirements. The following are some
areas to consider:
·
Flexible Numbering Plan (102) Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential to a
smooth installation. Trunk group access and station range requirements are especially important areas
of consideration.
·
COS (103) Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk groups.
There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
·
DRL (111) Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Important!
Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known as Toll
Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CTX's Destination Restriction feature.
Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when programming Toll Restriction
requirements.
·
FRL and QPL (506) Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level (FRL) and Queuing Priority Level
(QPL) assignments.
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Follow the steps below to program the Strata CTX for the first time. Following this initial setup procedure
enables you to perform a standard Strata CTX setup with common System and Station default assignments.
Toshiba recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup.
1. Card Assignments (100) Choose System > Card Assignment. It is not necessary to physically install
PCBs prior to programming Strata CTX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, CTX WinAdmin automatically recognizes
PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default stations and trunks
automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See "100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments" on
page 4-1 for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See "304
Incoming Line Group Assignment" on page 6-2 for more details. ILGs enable line groupings of shared
Class of Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See "306
Outgoing Line Groups" on page 6-4 for more details.
4. Trunk Assignment (300) Choose Trunk > Basic. Set up your Trunks in the following order (see "300
Trunk Assignment" on page 6-6 for more details):
·
Loop Start Trunks
·
Ground Start Trunks
·
T1 Trunks
·
Ti e lines
·
FX lines
1-12
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
·
PRI lines
·
BR I lines
Pr
St
ogr
5. Station Assignment (200) Choose Station > Basic. Set up your stations in the following order (see
ra
am
t
"Assignment" on page 5-1 for more details):
a CTX
m
·
DKT Stations
ing
·
Standard Stations
·
Voice Mail (VM) Ports
·
Attendant Positions
·
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
·
Door Phones
6. Create Station Links Create the following groups wherever applicable and set stations to link as
necessary.
·
Hunt Groups using Programs 209 and 218
·
Paging Groups using Program 502
·
Call Pickup Groups using Program 210
·
Park Orbits using Program 102
·
Paging Devices using Program 503
7. Backup Data Choose Operation\Data Backup. Make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted
(see "908 SmartMedia" on page 10-4) prior to running backup. See "910 Data Backup" on page 10-13
for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CTX details.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-13

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Review Program Flow
The basic program flow needed to set up Strata CTX is shown below. The figure displays the most critical
programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming flows from
specific (left) to general (right).
Card Assignment
(Program 100)
LS Trunks
Admin
GS Trunks
TI Trunks
Tie Lines
Create ILGs
FX Lines
(Program 304)
PRI Lines
Services
BRI Lines
Create OLGs
DKT Stations
(Program 306)
LCR/TR
STD Stations
VM Ports
Attd Positions
Pilot DN's (ACD)
Recommended*
Door Phones
System Program
BRI Lines
Planning the following before
proceeding.
5862
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102):
Trunk Group Access Plan
Create Station Links
Station Range Plan
Create COS Plan (up to 32)
Hunt Group
(Program 103)
Paging Group
Call P.U. Group
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111, 532~533)
Park Orbits
Paging Devices
Define FRL and QPL
meanings (up to 16)

*Planning out these details
in advance enables Strata CTX
setup to proceed smoothly.
1-14
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Pr
Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup requirements. See the
St
ogr
r
Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.
a
am
ta CTX
mi
Station Setup
ng
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up Station requirements.
Station
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
DKT
PDN
100
200
204
208
205
PhDN
205
206
DADM
204
213
DDSS
214
215
Attd
100
200
204
208
Ext
100
200
208
VM
100
200
204
206
209
218
579
580
ISDN
Ext
100
202
217
Pilot DN
540
Station Hunting
209
218
Call Pickup Groups
210
Emergency Ringdown
216
Paging Groups
502
Station Speed Dial
516
Trunk Setup Analog
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
300
Ring
310
LS/GS
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Tie line
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Ring
309
Timer
308
DID
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-15

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Trunk Setup T1
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
LS/GS
Ring
310
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
Tie line
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
Ring
309
DID
Timer
308
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
Trunk Setup ISDN PRI
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
302
320
Ring
309
Timer
308
DID
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
CNIS
321
322
Basic
100
304
306
302
320
Tie line
Ring
309
Timer
308
D-share
100
304
306
302
320
316
CBC
100
3041
3061
3022
320
3233
Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.
1-16
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Miscellaneous
Pr
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CTX features.
St
ogr
ra
am
t
Feature
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
a CTX
m
Account-Codes
570
571
103
506
306
ing
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
103
208
104
Automatic Call Back (ACB)
104
Automatic Camp-On
304
Auto-Release of CO
308
Background-Music (BGM)
102
103
109
Call Forwarding
103
200
217
Call History
204
205
Call Park Orbit
104
102
Call Xfer W/ Camp-On
103
COS-Station
200
202
COS-CO
304
306
Credit-Card Calling
105
111
306
Day/Night service
500
106
112
113
103
105
Identification Services
309
318
579
Digital PAD
107
114
Direct Inward Dialing
309
318
304
DISA
311
Direct Inward Termination
304
310
Do not Disturb (DND)
103
204
205
102
Door Lock Control
104
204
508
205
Door Phones
102
507
573
DTMF DP Compatible
104
DTMF BackTone
204
DTMF Signal Time
579
104
200
E911
105
217
550
104
306
202
Executive Override
103
105
External Ringing Repeat
300
204
Flash
308
205
102
103
Flexible Numbering
102
Group Paging
502
503
102
Least-Cost-Routing (LCR)
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
528
529
103
Line Group
304
305
306
307
317
302
323
300
Message-Waiting Light
204
102
579
Music-on-Hold
102
105
109
309
310
Off-Hook Camp-on
104
200
217
Network Call Incoming
102
656
Network Call Outgoing
102
651
653
654
655
Out-Going calls
200
217
104
Ringing-Transfer
105
SMDI
200
202
579
580
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04
1-17

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Feature
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Station CO Line Access
204
SMDR
512
513
514
Tandem Connection
103
104
300
DR Override by System's
105
Speed Dial
Destination Restriction
200
202
306
650
530
531
532
533
534
Tone-First/Voice-First
204
206
Travelling COS
105
200
510
Voice-Mail Interface
See "Voice Mail Set Up" on
100
200
209
218
579
580
803
804
309
318
page A-1
Emergency Ring-Down
216
Relay Services
515
System Call-Forward
200
217
104
500
504
Call Pick Up
210
103
200
205
102
1-18
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 6/04

726+,%$
Digital Solutions Division
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
June 2004

CTX WinAdmin Overview
2
CTX WinAdmin is a powerful Microsoft® Windows® based telephone system management tool used to
CTX W
program, maintain and upgrade the Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System. CTX WinAdmin uses
O
a variety of networking and software technologies as follows:
ver i
vi
nAd
·
Virtual Local Area Network (LAN) System Administrators can connect their PC to
ew
Strata CTX via a network interface jack or modem. CTX WinAdmin views the Strata CTX system as a
min
LAN providing a stable environment in which to program and access data.

·
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) enables query-based information retrieval and
event notification. WMI is an access mechanism which enables CTX WinAdmin to access, monitor,
command and control Strata CTX.
·
Virtual Web Server and Manager creates a virtual World Wide Web environment in Strata CTX.
This technology enables CTX WinAdmin to view Strata CTX as if it were an Internet Service Provider
(ISP), providing secure passage for System Administrators.
·
Microsoft Internet Explorer® browser access Virtual Web Service enables System Administrators
to access Strata CTX using the Internet Explorer browser.
·
CTX WinAdmin Graphical User Interface (GUI) Sophisticated programming tasks are just a
click-of-the-mouse away with CTX WinAdmin's GUI.
·
Mobile Access enables System Administrators to program, maintain, and/or upgrade a
Strata CTX from any mobile location with an Internet connection--without ever leaving the office.
·
Internet Access CTX WinAdmin uses Microsoft IP technology to enable access to your Strata CTX
as easy as browsing the World Wide Web.
·
Personal Web Server and Manager Microsoft's Personal Web Server and Manager option package
enables you to build a web environment between your Strata CTX and your PC.
·
Internet Explorer provides a stable environment in which to program, maintain and upgrade your
Strata CTX.
CTX WinAdmin's tight integration of the above technologies provide System Administrators with
convenient, stable, user friendly and comprehensive access to Strata CTX system information.
CTX WinAdmin can connect directly to your Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System via Network
Interface (included with Strata CTX's BECU board and required on your PC) and Modem Interface.
Mobile System Administrators can access a Strata CTX system from any location that provides Internet
access.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
2-1

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen
After you start CTX WinAdmin, log in and connect to the CTX, the main screen (shown below) displays.
Verify the information on this screen. It contains the System type and Software version.
Auto Flyover On/Off Button
Program Viewer
Program Menu
7376
·
Auto Flyover On/Off Button You can click this toggle button to turn on or turn off flyovers.
·
Program Menu The primary tool used to navigate through CTX WinAdmin. Click the Expand or
Collapse buttons at the upper left corner to expand or collapse the Program menu.
Note The CTX28 Program menus are different compared to the CTX100 and CTX670. For the Expanded
view of all the CTX28 menus, see "CTX28 Programming Menus" on page 2-3.
·
Program Viewer This area is where the various programs and parameters are displayed as you
navigate through CTX WinAdmin.
Notes
·
You can verify the Strata CTX system type (CTX100 or CTX670) and the software version on the Title
screen shown above.
·
The software version is organized as follows:
O
Example: AR1.01 M0010.00
O
A = Country code (USA, Canada, Mexico).
O
R1.01 = CTX Release 1.01
O
M000xx.00 = Strata CTX software version.
2-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen
CTX28 Programming Menus
The CTX28 Program menus are different compared to the CTX100 and CTX670. Below is the Expanded
view of all CTX28 menus. It also lists programs menus that are not available when connected to the
CTX28.
CTX W
Over ivinAdew
min
The following are not available in the
CTX28 Menus:
O
Station > ISDN
O
Services > Networking
O
Trunk > DID
O
Trunk > DID Intercept
O
Trunk > T1
O
Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View
O
Trunk > ISDN
O
Trunk > Setup Wizard
O
Operation > License Control
O
Operation > License
Information
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
2-3

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
The CTX WinAdmin operates in a user friendly Windows environment featuring interactive Graphical
User Interface (GUI) screens.The Program Viewer's GUI is arranged to streamline the Strata CTX
programming process (see sample screen below).
Toolbar
Program Details
Tabs
Program Name
Program Menu
Programming functions can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate link in the Program Menu. The Day
Night Service (Programs 112, 106 and 113) screen is shown in the sample below.
Command Table Button
Toolbar
Special Buttons
Command Group Name
Programming
Parameters
Field Name
5698
Program Blocks
Program and Parameter Descriptions
2-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
The following features enable you to browse and program CTX WinAdmin efficiently.
·
Program Blocks CTX WinAdmin arranges many related programs in blocks to enable the
programmer to view essential and related programs on one screen.
·
Program Tabs  You can access a variety of programs and features by clicking the Program Tabs found
on some of the CTX WinAdmin screens.
·
Programming Parameters Choose values from scroll down menus.
·
Command Group Name Each program number and title is prominently displayed for easy reference.
·
Field Name Each Field Name or parameter displays and is coded with a prefix ()%) number for easy
referencing.
CTX W
O
·
Program and Parameter Descriptions Every program and parameter description displays in a
ve
pop-up window by placing the mouse cursor over the program or parameter information.
r
i
vi
nAd
ew
·
CTX WinAdmin Toolbar The CTX WinAdmin Toolbar enables Strata CTX updates with a click of
m
your mouse button. The following options are provided.
in
·
Edit CTX WinAdmin defaults to the Edit mode used to program, maintain, or upgrade your Strata
CTX System.
·
Cancel Cancels the previous entry.
·
Refresh Displays the latest updates.
·
Reset Resets to set your Strata CTX to manufacturer's default.
CAUTION!
By pressing the Reset button, you are authorizing all data to be reset to manufacturing
defaults. Any custom data entered will be lost.
·
Submit New data is held in CTX WinAdmin's memory. Your Strata CTX is not updated with the
new settings until the Submit button is clicked.
·
Close Exits CTX WinAdmin and return to CTX Management Console Menu.
·
Disconnect Disconnects CTX WinAdmin from Strata CTX and terminates TCP/IP
Communications.
·
Help Enables the CTX WinAdmin Help files.
·
Command Table Button  This button
enables you to locate programs by
number or category (shown right).
From this table, you can click on a
program to open it.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
2-5

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
CTX28 Command Table
The CTX28 Command Table displays commands or programs that are applicable to the CTX28 only.The
CTX28 Command Table screens are as follows:
2-6
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
Special Buttons
These buttons appear on some of the CTX WinAdmin screens.
These buttons enable you to access the
most common programming tasks
quickly. For example, click on the List
button to view the Current Index Web
Page dialog box (shown right).
CTX W
O
Clicking on any button lets you do the
ve
following:
r
i
vi
nAd
ew
·
Create Create a new record using
mi
system default values.
n
·
Start Starts a wizard.
·
Add/Delete/Modify Enables you to add/delete/modify entry(s). In some programs, click the Add or
Delete button for a dialog box to display. Enter the required data, then click Add or Delete.
·
List Lists all data.
·
Copy Enables you to copy all the information from one screen to another.
·
Back/Next Enables you to navigate forward and backward through the screens.
·
Table View Displays the appropriate table view. For example, clicking the DR Table View button
displays all the configured DRLs within the system.
·
Print Enables you to print to a local printer.
·
Refresh Enables you to get the most updated information.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
2-7

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
Table Views
Some programs contain supporting tables views. These tables can be accessed from the Program Menu or
from the program itself, by clicking the Table view button. For example, the System Speed Dial Table
View can be accessed by clicking System > System Speed Dial Table View or by clicking the System
Speed Dial Table View button under Program 501 System > System Speed Dial.
Notes
·
Depending on the speed of your PC and the size of your database, the table may take several minutes
to download.
·
Once table view displays, you can minimize the screen or send it to the background. It is an
independent window that can always be brought back to the front of the screen for reference.
The tables have the following functionality (See table view example below):
Previous
Next
First 25 Entries
Last 25 Entries
Navigation
Control Bar
Column Headers
Sort Indicator
Book Mark
6869
·
Navigational controls enable viewing or moving on a table by 25-entry screens. These controls help
sort information found in the table or view the table in full. These controls are found as Previous and
Next buttons above the header.
If you want to print or analyze the table, you can also select All from the Drop down between the
Previous and Next buttons to view the entire table in blocks of 25 entries.
In the Navigation Control bar, every button is dynamically activated or deactivated. For example, in the
figure above the Previous button is not active because the view starts with the first record. The Submit
is also not available because nothing has been changed.
·
Sort You can sort tables by clicking on the column header. The direction of the up/down toggles in an
Ascending or Descending sort. The color indicator pointing Up or Down in the Header row indicates
the column by which the sort is performed.
2-8
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
·
Bookmark You can bookmark a row on some tables by clicking on the row. This enables you to move
forward and backward and come back to the original position with no problem.
Note The bookmark function is not provided in tables that have a Delete button, example "Hunt Group
Table View" on page 5-28. Tables that have a Delete button also have Select All and Unselect All
buttons.
·
Edit/Refresh/Print buttons You
can edit, refresh or print the table
by clicking the appropriate
buttons at the top of the screen.
In some tables the Edit button
CTX W
toggles between View Collected
O
Data and Edit. Clicking the Edit
ver i
button displays the following
vi
nAd
ew
screen.
min
The Edit function works for the
Name, Number and Destination
columns.
Use the Refresh button if you
add, delete or make changes to
table entries, in Programs that
feed tables or in Guide pages.
The Print button enables you to
print tables. However, when you click the Print button, only the part of the table that is displayed on the
screen prints. Use the scroll bar to Print beyond what is displayed. It will then automatically print from
where the last screen ended.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
2-9

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
2-10
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
3
TDSVR02/TOSHIB-TAISThis chapter shows you how to install CTX WinAdmin software on your PC
and discusses how to connect that PC to the Strata CTX system.
PC Hardware Requirements
The following table shows the minimum PC requirements for CTX WinAdmin and WinCTX to operate
properly:
Hardware
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2000
300 MHz or higher processor clock
Inst
speed. Intel Pentium or Celeron
Computer/Processor
300 MHz or higher Pentium
al
processors; or AMD K6, Athlon or
lat
Duron processors are recommended.
ion
Memory
128MB RAM
128MB RAM
2GB hard drive with a minimum of
Hard Disk
1.5GB of available space
650MB of free space
SVGA Card and Monitor
Yes
Yes
CD-ROM Drive
Yes
Yes
Network Interface Card
Yes
Yes
(NIC) and/or PC Modem
PC Software Requirements
The "Install CTX WinAdmin..." selection on the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation Check
to determine if your PC meets the minimum software requirements for CTX WinAdmin to operate
properly. The Pre-installation Check tests for the following:
·
Windows Operating System CTX WinAdmin requires a Microsoft Windows XP Professional or
Windows 2000 Operating System (OS).
·
Windows Option Components The Pre-installation Check tests to see if Windows Option
Components, such as Internet Information Services and Management and Monitoring Tools are
installed on your PC. If they are not installed, your Windows OS CD-ROM will be required; or if your
PC has an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) version of Windows, you may need the CD-ROM
that came with your PC.
Disclaimer:
CTX WinAdmin has not been tested with Windows NT 4.0. This OS is not recommended. We
recommend that you upgrade your OS to Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 Pro.
Note CTX WinAdmin does not work on these operating systems: Windows XP Home, Windows ME,
Windows 98, Windows 95, and MS-DOS.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-1

Installation
Install CTX WinAdmin Software
·
Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 (SP2) If not found, follow the steps given on the CTX WinAdmin CD-
ROM to install SP2.
·
Internet Explorer (IE) If IE 5.5 or greater is not found, follow the steps given on the CTX
WinAdmin CD-ROM and install it from there.
Note Windows XP Professional automatically installs IE 6.0 so installing IE 5.5 is not needed.
CAUTION!
Toshiba recommends not to install MS Network Monitor on WinAdmin PCs because
MS Network Monitor software which is provided on the Microsoft System
Management Server (SMS) production CD-ROM causes problems with the Windows
WMI SNMP component needed to run WinAdmin.
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software
1. Insert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. Click "Install CTX WinAdmin...". The
CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation check, determines the OS you have, then checks for all other software
requirements.
If the correct OS and all requirements were found on your PC, the "Pre-installation Check Complete!"
screen displays. This enables you to perform any of the following:
·
First-time installation: click "Install Now". Follow the prompts. Choose "Custom" to browse to the
drive on which you want to install the software or "Complete" to install immediately on the C: drive.
·
If upgrading from a previous version: click "Upgrade Now". Select "Complete" to install the new
version on the C drive, select Custom to select another drive. The CTX WinAdmin Custom Profile
folders will remain on the C drive or copied to the selected drive.
·
If installing over the same version: click Install Now. You will be prompted to "Repair" or "Remove."
Repair fixes corrupted files and registry entries. Remove removes the existing version to enable you to
reinstall the same version as a new clean install.
·
If your PC did not pass the Pre-installation check and a requirement was not found: see the details
in "Requirements Not Found" on page 3-3.
CAUTION!
Do not open and/or run other applications during installation as this may corrupt the
installation and/or other software on your PC. Installation takes several minutes.
2. Once installation is complete, if the Windows Internet Wizard displays when you click on the CTX
WinAdmin icon, enter the settings below if using a NIC or modem connection. This establishes a
preliminary path to bring up the CTX WinAdmin log-in screen.
·
Windows XP Pro: If the Windows "Welcome to the New Connection Wizard" comes up, you have not
yet configured your Internet connection. Follow the prompts and select: Next > Connect to Internet >
Next > Set up my connection manually > Next > Connect using broadband connect that is always on >
Finish. Exit the wizard screen.
·
Windows 2000: If the Windows "Welcome to the Internet Connection Wizard" comes up, you have not
yet configured your Internet connection. Follow the prompts and select: I want to set up my Internet
connection manually > Next > I want to connect through a local area network > Next > Automatic
discovery of Proxy server > Next and No to Setup Your Internet Email Account > Next > Finish.
3. Go on to "Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software" on page 3-5.
3-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Install CTX WinAdmin Software
Requirements Not Found
Service Pack 2 Not Found - Windows 2000
If Service Pack 2 was not found on your Windows 2000 OS, follow these steps.
1. Click the "Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 Not Found" line. A help screen appears. Locate and click the
"Install SP2 Now" link. SP2 installation will begin.
2. Follow the prompts to install SP2.
3. At the end of installation you will be prompted to restart your PC. Do so, log back into Windows 2000,
then reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select "Install CTX WinAdmin..." from the Main
Menu.
Internet Explorer (IE) 5.5 or Greater Not Found - Windows 2000
1. Click the "Internet Explorer 5.5 or Greater Not Found" line. A help screen will appear. Locate and click
the "Upgrade to IE 5.5 Now". The upgrade will begin. Follow the prompts to upgrade to IE 5.5.
2. At the end of installation you will be prompted to restart your PC. Do so, log back into Windows 2000.
3. Reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select "Install CTX WinAdmin..." from the Main Menu.
Note We suggest using IE 6.0 or higher with CTX WinAdmin to enable lists to be displayed in numeric
Inst
order.
allat
Internet Information Services (IIS) Not Found - Windows XP Pro/Windows 2000
ion
If IIS was not found, follow the steps below.
CAUTION!
Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) on PCs connected to a LAN and/or the
Internet may cause security issues - such as making your PC more susceptible to
intrusion and/or computer viruses. A direct connection between your PC and Strata
CTX reduces, but does not eliminate security issues.
·
In all cases, always have a virus program with the latest virus tables running real-time on your PC.
·
An NTFS file system is recommended if you are connected to a LAN and/or Internet. See your
Windows Help files for more details.
·
Consult the Microsoft Knowledge Base on the Internet for updates on Windows security issues.
·
Check if you have the I386 folder located on you PC, if not have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as
you will be asked to insert it.
Installing IIS using Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 CD-ROM
1. Windows XP Pro and Windows 2000: Click Start > Settings (2000 only)> Control Panel > Add/
Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components. Checkmark Internet Information Services
(IIS). Under IIS option, check mark FTP and do not uncheck any items that are already checked. If
Management and Monitoring Tools were also Not Found you may checkmark this too. Click "Next".
2. Follow the prompts and have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as you will be asked to insert it. If the
Windows autoplay menu runs after inserting the CD-ROM, close this screen.
3. Once installation is complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select "Install WinAdmin..."
from the Main Menu.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-3

Installation
Install CTX WinAdmin Software
Note If your PC displays this error message
(shown right), insert the Windows OS
CD-ROM that came with your computer
(Recovery or Companion type) and not
the Service Pack2 CD-ROM. Follow the
prompts to browse, open and install files.
Management and Monitoring Tools Not Found - Windows XP Pro/Windows 2000
If Management and Monitoring Tools were not found, follow the steps below.
1. Windows XP Pro and Windows 2000: Click Start > Settings (2000 only)> Control Panel > Add/
Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components. Checkmark Management and Monitoring
Tools. If Internet Information Services (IIS) were also Not Found you may checkmark this too. Click
"Next".
2. Follow the prompts and have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as you will be asked to insert it. If the
Windows autoplay menu runs after inserting the CD-ROM, close this screen.
3. Once installation is complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select "Install CTX
WinAdmin..." from the Main Menu.
WMI SNMP Provider Not Found - Windows 2000
If the WMI SNMP Provider was not found on your Windows 2000 PC, follow the steps below. Have your
Windows 2000 CD-ROM ready, you'll be asked to insert it.
1. Click the "WMI SNMP Provider Not Found" line. A help screen appears.
2. Locate and click the "Install WMI SNMP Provider". Follow the prompts to install WMI SNMP
Provider. Once complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select "Install CTX
WinAdmin..." from the Main Menu.
Important!
Continue to choose "Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software" on page 3-5 and/or
"Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software" on page 3-10. You can choose either or both, but
you must choose one.
3-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX
Processor NIC
1. Connect the RJ45 cable between your PC's NIC jack and the Strata CTX Network Interface jack. If you
are connecting to Strata CTX directly without using a Network hub, use an RJ45 cross-pinned cable. If
you're connecting to the Strata CTX via a hub, use a straight-pinned RJ45 cable. See Figures 3-1
and 3-2.
WinAdmin PC or Server, Direct Connection to Strata CTX
Cross-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord
Pin
Pin
Strata CTX
PC or Server
1 TD+
RD+
3
ACTU with AETS
2 TD-
RD-
6
or
RD+
TD+
3
1
BBCU Processor
RD-
TD-
CTX WinAdmin
6
2
NIC
Inst
6249
al
Network Interface with RJ45 Jack
la
Network Interface Card with RJ45 Jack
tion
Figure 3-1
Direct Connection to Strata CTX
WinAdmin PC or Server, Network or HUB Connection to Strata CTX
Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord
Pin
Pin
Strata CTX
1 TD+
RD+
1
2 TD-
RD-
2
RD+
TD+
ACTU with AETS
3
3
RD-
TD-
or BBCU
6
6
Processor
Network Interface RJ45 Jack
LAN
(with/without
PC or Server
DHCP/VPN)
or
CTX WinAdmin
Application
HUB
Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord
NIC
Network Interface RJ45 Jack
6250
Figure 3-2
Network Interface Physical Jack Connection
Wide Area Networks and/or Internet Connections
·
Connection of the Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin over the Internet and/or Wide Area Network
(WAN) Enterprise Networks requires registration of a domain IP address or blocks of domain IP
addresses for CTX processors when using multiple Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin connections.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-5

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
·
To setup CTX WinAdmin WAN and Internet connections using Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP), Virtual Private Networks (VPN), etc., the proper IP addresses and setup procedures
must be obtained from your Information Technology (IT) Administrator.
·
We recommend using VPN networking. By using VPN networking, the content of SNMP messages
between WinAdmin PCs and CTX systems will be encrypted for security.
·
When connecting CTX WinAdmin through Fire Walls, Routers, etc., which apply packet filtering,
make sure that the packets being sent between Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin are not filtered.
·
Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin communicate using SNMP over User Datagram Protocol/Internet
Protocol (UDP/IP) and FTP protocols. The standard ports are used for each protocol (161 and 162 for
SNMP, 20 and 21 for FTP). These ports should not be blocked by firewalls.
·
The default gateway IP address must be set up on CTX WinAdmin and on CTX processors per the
example in Figure 3-3. The figure below shows you how to connect the multiple CTX sites via the
WAN.
·
The CTX processor requires the following IP addresses set in Program 916:
·
Processor static domain IP address
·
Processor subnet mask
·
Processor default Gateway IP address
·
The diagram below is only one example of many network configurations allowing remote maintenance
of CTX systems over the Internet and the WAN.
Ethernet
Ethernet
Switch
Switch
Strata
CTX
Default Gateway
Strata
192.168.20.1
CTX
Default Gateway
192.168.10.1
Router
WAN
Router
WinAdmin
PC
192.168.10.1
192.168.20.1
LAN Backbone
LAN Backbone
WinAdmin
Router
WinAdmin
PC
192.168.30.1
PC
LAN Backbone
SITE A
SITE B
WinAdmin
6540
Strata
CTX
PC
Default Gateway
192.168.30.1
SITE C
Figure 3-3
WAN Connection for Multiple Sites
3-6
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to "Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections" on page 3-5.
1. Connect a 20-button LCD DKT to the Strata CTX System.
2. Enter the programming mode by pressing CyqÃ4Æ4Æ 4!4"4.
3. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter .
4. PressÃCyq.
5. At the PROG= prompt enter ( % and press Cyq.
6. Press Feature Button 1.
7. At the TCP IP1= prompt enter the Static IP address hÃTx, iÃTx, pÃTx, q Cyq.
Possible Values of CTX TCP/IP address octets a.b.c.d = 0~255.
Default = 192.168.254.253, where h = 192, i = 168, p = 254, q = 253
Example: At the TCP IP1= prompt the LCD displays 192. This is the first octet of the default CTX IP
address. Pressing Spkr key three more times will display the remaining octets in succession as follows:
192.168.254.253
In
8. Press Feature Button 2.
stal
9. At the SNM IP1= prompt enter the subnet mask
l
r Tx, s Tx, t Tx, u Cyq.
ati
Possible Values of CTX Subnet mask octets e.f.g.h = 0~255
on
Default = 255.255.255.0, where r = 255, s = 255, t = 255, u = 0
10.Press Feature Button 3.
11. At the DGW IP1= prompt enter default gateway v Tx, w Tx, x Tx, y Cyq.
Possible Values for CTX Gateway octets i.j.k.l = 0~255
Default = 0.0.0.0, where v = 0, w = 0, x = 0, y = 0
12.Press CyqÃ(twice).
Important!
Windows XP: Choose Step 2C; Windows 2000: Choose Step 2D.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-7

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2C: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC
(Windows XP)
Follow the steps below to set up PC Network settings on your CTX WinAdmin PC.
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to "Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections" on page 3-5.
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections > Broadband
Connection.
2. At the Broadband Connection screen, click the Properties tab, then click on the Networking tab.
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
4. Click on the Properties tab.
5. Select "Use the following IP Address."
6. In the IP address field enter a.b.c.x
where a.b.c = 0~255 and x = 0~252.
Example: 192.168.254.x.
Note The first three octets a.b.c. have to be exactly the same as the first three octets of the CTX IP address
set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. X cannot be 253 or above and it cannot be equal to octet d of the CTX
TCP/IP address set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. This is the static IP Address of your PC.
7. Click OK and exit.
3-8
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2D: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC
(Windows 2000)
Follow the steps below to set up PC Network settings on your WinAdmin PC.
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to "Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections" on page 3-5.
1. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connections > Local Area Connections.
2. Right click on Local Area Connections to select
Properties.
3. Local Area Connection Properties Connection screen
displays. Ensure Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked. Highlight TCP/IP, then click the
Properties button.
4. On the General tab click the "Use the following IP
Address" radio button (shown right).
5. In the IP address field enter a.b.c.x
In
where a.b.c = 0~255 and x = 0~252.
stal
Example: 192.168.254.x.
lati
The first three octets a.b.c. have to be exactly the same
on
as the first three octets of the CTX IP address set in Sub-
step 7 of Step 2B. x cannot be 253 or above and it
cannot be equal to octet d of the CTX TCP/IP address
set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. This is the static IP Address of your PC.
6. Enter e.f.g.h. in the Subnet Mask field. The Subnet Mask should be exactly the same as the CTX
Subnet Mask set in Sub-step 9 of Step 2B.
Possible Values of Subnet mask octets e.f.g.h = 0~255
Example: 255.255.255.0
7. Leave the DNS Server addresses blank.
8. Click OK (to accept all screens).
9. Go to "Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software" on page 3-14.
CTX WinAdmin is now ready to communicate and program your Strata CTX System.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-9

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Step 3A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Modem
Connect an RJ11 cable from your PC modem to an active phone line or RSTU port. See Figure 3-43-4.
Point-to-point TCP/IP
BCTU,
BECU or
Flash
ACTU/
or ROM
AMDS
and
RS-232 Cable
33.6 kbps v.34
Modem
RAM
Dial #19
Modem
RSTU
Time
Local CTX
Switch
WinAdmin PC
CO Line
CO Line
Telephone
CO Line
Modem
Network
Circuit
Strata CTX
5592
RS-232 Cable
Remote CTX
WinAdmin PC
Figure 3-4
CTX WinAdmin Modem Interface Connection
CTX WinAdmin PC Modem to CTX Modem Call Setup CTX Programming and Operation
·
Direct ring connection over CO lines
·
DID lines: in PRG 309, assign "Built-in Modem" as the Audio Day1, Day, and/or Night destination
type.
·
DIT ground/loop start lines: in PRG 310 assign "Built-in Modem" as the Day1, Day2, and/or Night
destination type.
·
Direct Ring when connected to RSTU or DISA line: put "#19" in CTX WinAdmin Phone Number
dial string.
·
Transfer a CTX WinAdmin call to the Strata CTX modem from a CTX Auto Attendant or telephone
After receiving the call from the CTX WinAdmin user, press &QI7UQ or hook flash and dial #19 then
hang up after receiving CTX modem tone.
Note If calling an Auto Attendant put "xxxxxxx,,,,,,,, #19" in CTX WinAdmin Phone Number dial string.
Where "xxxxxxx" is the site phone number and each "," adds a three-second delay before dialing
#19 to connect to the modem.
Important!
Windows XP: Choose Step 3B; Windows 2000: Choose Step 3C.
3-10
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 3B: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem
(Windows XP)
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to "Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections" on page 3-5.
1. Set up PC modem settings for CTX WinAdmin. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet
Connection > Network Connections > Create a New Connection (under Network Tasks).
2. At the New Connection screen, click Next. Select radio button "Connect to the network at my
workplace" and click Next.
3. Select radio button "Dial-up Connection" and click Next.
4. Enter the company name as "Remote CTX1",
then click Next.
5. Leave the Phone Number to Dial field blank.
Click Next.
6. Click Finish.
7. At the Connect Remote CTX1 screen, click
Properties.
Inst
8. At the RemoteCTX1 Properties screen, select
alla
the PC modem that should be used to connect
tion
to the CTX modem.
9. Click the Networking tab.
10.Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
11. Click Properties.
12.Select Use the following IP Address.
13.Enter an IP Address 192.168.255.x (where x can be 1~252. It cannot be 253 or above. It cannot
be the same as the CTX IP address in Program 916 for CTX NIC Connections). This is the static IP
Address of your PC when using the modem connection. Click OK.
14.At the CTX1 Properties screen, click the Options
tab and set up options to the recommended settings
shown as shown right.
15.Click OK. You can go back and change these
settings later if needed.
16.At the CTX1 Properties screen, click OK and exit.
17.Go to "Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software"
on page 3-14.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-11

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings
Using the steps below verify that the modem hardware settings are set correctly to communicate with the
CTX built-in modem.
1. Go to Start > Settings (Windows 2000 only) >
Control Panel.
2. Click "Phone and Modem Options."
3. Click the Modem tab.
4. Select the modem used by CTX WinAdmin.
5. Click the Properties button.
6. Click the Advanced tab to verify hardware settings on
the screen (shown right).
7. Click OK and exit.
3-12
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 3D: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem
(Windows 2000)
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to "Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections" on page 3-5.
1. Setup PC modem settings for CTX WinAdmin. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connection > Make New Connection.
2. Click Next. Select radio button Dial-up to private network and click Next.
3. From the "Select a Device Screen" highlight the modem to be used to make a CTX WinAdmin dial-up
connection and click Next.
4. Do not enter Phone number, then click Next.
Note The phone number for Dial up is entered when setting up the Profile in Strata CTX WinAdmin. See
"User Management" on page 3-19.
5. Select radio button "For all users," then click Next.
6. Use the recommended setting (Enable on-demand dialing) and click Next.
7. Type RemoteCTX1 as the name in Connection
In
Wizard (shown right), then click Finish.
stal
8. The Connect RemoteCTX1 screen displays.
lation
Note The User name field on this screen will
automatically be populated.
9. Click on the Properties button of the Connect
RemoteCTX1 screen.
10. The RemoteCTX1 screen displays. Click on
the Networking tab and select Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) in the Components checked are used
by this connection box. Then click Properties
button.
11. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
screen displays. Select "Use the following IP Address" and enter
the IP address (192.168.255.x, where x can be 1~252. It cannot
be 253 or above. It cannot be the same as the CTX IP address in
Program 916 for CTX NIC Connections). This IP address is the
static IP address for the PC when using this modem connection.
Click OK.
12. The initial setup screen displays. Click Properties.
13. Click the Options tab and set up options to the recommended
settings (shown right).
Note Set "Idle time before hanging up" to more than one minute if
you are transferring CTX WinAdmin calls to the CTX built-
in modem versus direct calls to the modem.
14.The initial setup screen displays, click OK and exit.
15.Go to Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings.
16.Go to "Establish Communication with Strata CTX" on page 3-14.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-13

Installation
Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Make sure you have completed the Strata CTX to CTX WinAdmin setup procedures described in the first
part of this chapter before proceeding.
¥ To ensure your WinAdmin pages will automatically update
1. Open Internet Explorer.
2. Click on Tools > Internet Options...
3. Under Temporary Internet Files, click on
the Settings button.
4. Check for newer versions of stored
pages, set the radio button to
"Automatically." Click OK. You only
need to perform these steps once (unless
the Settings are changed)
3-14
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Establish Communication with Strata CTX
¥ To establish communication with Strata CTX
1. Open Internet Explorer and point the browser to http://localhost/Ctmc_Local/Default.htm
as shown in the figure below or click on the CTX WinAdmin desktop icon. If the Internet Connection
Wizard displays, refer to Step 2 under "Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software" on page 3-2.
2. Click Go. The Login screen
displays (shown right).
3. To log into CTX WinAdmin for
the first time, enter administrator
in User Name field and password
in the Password field.
Installation
4. Click on the Login button. The
CTX WinAdmin Title screen displays.
5. Click CTX (shown right) to go to the
connection setup screen.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-15

Installation
Establish Communication with Strata CTX
6. From the Connection Options Menu
(shown at right) enter the following:
·
Community Name
communityName (entry is case
sensitive). This is the default
community name for CTX
systems.
·
CTX IP/Name
192.168.254.253 (NIC). This
is the default IP Address of the
CTX that is set in CTX Program
916.
·
IP Address
192.168.255.254 This is the
CTX built-in modem fixed IP
address for
Dial-up connections. It cannot be
changed.
6065
Notes
·
If you are connecting to Strata CTX using your modem, click in the Use Dial-Up box and enter the
phone number to connect to your Strata CTX. The CTX IP address in the CTX IP Name field
automatically defaults to the Strata CTX modem's static IP address.
·
If you are calling in from a modem line which is already connected to the CTX through manual dialing,
check the Use Dial-Up box. You do not have to enter anything in the Phone Number box. When you
hear modem tone, click Connect Now, then hang up.
·
If you have set up the Profile User Management screen with CTX site information, click on the CTX
Host name and IP address of the CTX listed in the box at the bottom of the screen.
·
Adding and Saving a new CTX connection can be done by clicking Profile > User Management. For
details see "User Management" on page 3-19.
7. Click on Connect Now. For CTX WinAdmin V2.10G.1 and higher, you will see a small dialog box
appears. Ignore this box. It will close automatically after you see the Connection Complete window and
click OK.
Important!
If you are not able to connect after clicking on the Connect Now button, then
re-check the set up steps described in this chapter.
3-16
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Manual Dialing to Connect to the CTX Modem
If the CTX WinAdmin application is running in Windows operating systems and you want to dial in to
CTX manually with a bridged telephone (operator-assisted dialing) instead of having CTX WinAdmin dial
the phone number, perform the following:
Step 1: Connect to the CTX modem with manual dialing
1. Make sure that your dialing phone is bridge connected to your modem's "Line" jack.
2. Set up your modem dialing for Windows Operator-Assisted Dialing by opening Network Connections
in the Control Panel.
3. On the Advanced menu at the top of the screen, select Operator-Assisted Dialing, then Exit.
Step 2: Make an operator-assisted call
1. Bring up the CTX
WinAdmin Connection
page (shown right).
2. Enter the CTX
Community Name (or
select a CTX Host
In
Name) and check Use
stal
Dial-Up.
lat
3. Enter a comma or a
ion
phone number in this
You must enter
a comma or a
box.
phone number.
4. Click Connect Now.
5. Go off-hook with the
bridge telephone and
dial the CTX site
number.
7016
6. When the call is
answered by a person or
Auto Attendant, ask to
be transferred to the
CTX modem number
#19. The called party
should then hang up.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-17

Installation
Establish Communication with Strata CTX
7. When you hear the modem beep or
steady modem tone from the CTX
modem, click OK from the
Operator Assisted Manual Dial
message box and then hang up the
bridged telephone.
7028
The WinAdmin and CTX modems
will communicate to start the
session and the dialing message
boxes will disappear.
8. Click OK.
7027
3-18
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX
Systems
User Management
Prerequisite Program: None
This program lets only the Administrator add or remove users to CTX WinAdmin.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Profile > Users Management.
2. Enter new User Name, Password,
Confirm Password, and FAC
Group Level fields.
Note The Administrator screen will
displays (shown right). The
Administrator can add new
users using this screen. This
screen is only accessible when
logged in as Administrator
Inst
only.
alla
3. Click Save.
tion
4. Enter the remaining fields.
5. Click Add/Modify/Remove.
The screen (shown right) is
accessible to all users.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-19

Installation
Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Enter the new User name. The initial user name of the Administrator is administrator. This
name cannot be changed.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Note
The Administrator is the only user that can add new users. The administrator user
name cannot be changed.
Password
Enter the new password. The initial password is password. This password can be changed
by the administrator or user. The password is case sensitive.
To protect User Passwords, open Internet Explorer and go to Tools > Internet Options >
Content > Autocomplete. Uncheck User Names and Password on forms, then click on Clear
Passwords.
CAUTION!
Record all your passwords for CTX WinAdmin and passwords for any
other applications that use Internet Explorer.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Confirm Password
Repeat password entered in Password field.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
FAC Group Level
Select the FAC Group Level.
Possible values: Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4 (default = No value.)
In the current version of CTX WinAdmin, all levels are the same and provide access to all
CTX WinAdmin functions.
CTX Host Name
Enter CTX Host Name (name to identify the CTX or customer).
Possible values: Alpha characters.
CTX IP/Name
Enter the IP Address of the CTX system. For the CTX NIC connection, enter the IP Address
of the CTX as set in Program 916. For Modem connections, always enter 192.168.255.254.
Possible values: Refer to "916 IP Configuration" on page 10-14.
Community Name
Enter the Community Name of the host.
Possible values: Alpha characters (default = communityName).
communityName is the default community name for all CTX systems. CTX community names
are assigned in the Operation section of CTX WinAdmin.
DialUp Number
Enter the telephone number for Dial Up access.
Possible values: Any telephone number (digits 0~9 and * or # and "," for three-second
pauses.)
Note
The CTX modem number is #19
Confirm Community
Re-enter the Community Name.
Name
Possible values: Alpha characters.
3-20
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
Prior to CTX WinAdmin V2.10G, only Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows 2000 Administrators
could use CTX WinAdmin to make changes. After CTX WinAdmin V2.10G has been installed, you can
enable CTX WinAdmin access to Windows Users who are members of the Windows Administrator's
group.
Users who are logged in to Windows on accounts that are not members of the Administrators group will
also be able to use all features of the WinAdmin application including connection to CTX via dial-up
networking. The only exception is that these non-Administrator users cannot modify the User Profile.
Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
After CTX WinAdmin has been installed, you can enable CTX WinAdmin access to Windows Users who
are members of the Windows Administrator's group. Prior to CTX WinAdmin V2.10G, only
Administrators could use CTX WinAdmin to make changes.
1. Go to the Windows Start button > Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Component Services.
2. Locate and open My Computer >
COM+ Applications.
Installation
3. From the COM+ Applications folder, right click
on IIS-{default web site/root/ctmc_Local}. Select
Properties > Identity tab, then select "This User"
(change from Interactive User).
4. Enter or browse and locate a Windows User name
(User must be a member of the Windows
Administrator group). Enter a password, and re-
enter the password in the Confirm box. Click OK.
5. Click on "x" in the upper right corner to close out
of Windows. The Windows User entered in the
previous step can now access CTX WinAdmin.
Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin
1. From the Program Menu, click Home.
2. Click on Exit at the CTX Management Console page.
3. Close your browser.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-21

Installation
WinCTX Offline Programming CTX R2.21 MH108
WinCTX Offline Programming CTX R2.21 MH108
The WinCTX software in conjunction with CTX WinAdmin 2.21A11 and higher, enables you to perform
offline programming for a Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system with Release R2.21 software MH109 or
MH110 only. With WinCTX and WinAdmin loaded on your PC, you can make programming changes
without being connected to the Strata CTX. WinCTX emulates the existence an operating CTX system so
WinAdmin can backup and save the edited programming data into a "default.dat" file on your PC. The
edited default.dat file can then be copied to a SmartMedia card and restored to a Strata CTX system.
CAUTION!
Only use version MH108 of WinCTX on CTX Release 2.21 MH109 or MH110. Do not
use this version of WinCTX on other versions or releases of CTX software data errors
will occur.
Tips and Limitations
1. The Download function of WinAdmin is not supported with WinCTX Off-line programming. You will
get error messages if you attempt to download programs.
2. Real time functions that only apply to an actual CTX (Date, Time of Day, etc.) do not apply to
WinAdmin Off-line programming.
3. When WinAdmin connects to WinCTX Off-line programming, the CTX Release will always show the
WinCTX release number in the System Setup screen and top information bar.
4. Licenses - always show fully licensed processors when viewing the License screen.
WinCTX Minimum PC Requirements
WinCTX must run on the WinAdmin PC so the requirements of the PC are the same as those for
WinAdmin. There are currently four WinCTX executable files. Each WinCTX executable file requires
about 15MB of hard drive space; or they can run from a CD-ROM to save hard drive space. A separate
WinCTX executable file is required for each CTX system (100 and 670) and each CTX release (R2.21) for
a total of four WinCTX files.
CTX WinAdmin Requirements for WinCTX
CTX WinAdmin, Version 2.21A11 or higher, is required to use WinCTX to edit CTX release 2.21 MH109
or MH110 system data.
Installing and Running WinCTX
WinCTX is a self-executable file and does not need to be installed. The executable file can be opened from
a CD-ROM, a folder on the hard drive or desktop icon. Click on the WinCTX.exe file or icon to run the
program. The "StopSNMPAgent.exe" file must be installed in the same directory as the WinCTX.exe file
(see "Run WinCTX" on page 3-23).
3-22
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
WinCTX Offline Programming CTX R2.21 MH108
Basic Procedure for Using WinCTX
This is a summary of how to use WinCTX. For detailed, step-by-step instrctions, see the following section
"Run WinCTX" on page 3-23.)
1. Open and then Start WinCTX. Be sure to open the correct version (see "Rules for Opening/Restoring
"default.dat files"" on page 3-25).
2. Run WinAdmin and connect to WinCTX (select Local WinCTX 127.0.0.1)
3. Edit the database using CTX WinAdmin.
4. Backup the database using CTX WinAdmin.
5. Exit CTX WinAdmin.
6. Stop WinCTX.
Run WinCTX
Win
1. Click on the WinCTX100 or
CTX
WinCTX670 icon (shown right).
2. If Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) service for Windows2000 or XP is activated,
WinCTX executes "StopSnmpAgent.exe." "Stopping SNMP Service. Please wait..."
In
appears on screen. After the SNMP Service is stopped, the Main window for WinCTX670 or
stal
WinCTX100 appears (shown in Step 3, below).
lati
If another application is using the SNMP port, you will see the window shown below. You will have to
on
manually stop the application by selecting Control Panel > Administrative tools > Services. Stop
SNMP service to prevent connection problems between WinAdmin and WinCTX. After stopping
SNMP service(s), click OK to continue.
7058
3. For WinCTX670, select
System Size (for
WinCTX100, skip to the
next step):
·
Basic system (Small)
Assumes BBMS and
Shows the
BEXU is not installed)
type of CTX
·
Expanded system
database
(Large) Assumes
supported.
BBMS and BEXU is
installed)
The WinCTX670 port
ranges are:
·
CTX100: 001 to 112
7054
·
CTX670 (Basic
System): 001 to 192
·
CTX670 (Expanded System): 001 to 672
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-23

Installation
WinCTX Offline Programming CTX R2.21 MH108
4. Select a Region Code: Click the down arrow and highlight a country. The Region Code is the same
country list in Program 915-04.
5. Select the Access Folder: This is where the "default.dat" file will be stored. The empty default folder is
"C:/WINCTX/SM/".
If you want to use a different folder that contains a default.dat file or create a new "default.dat" file,
click Browse. The Searching Access Folder window displays. Select a folder, then click Set.
To edit an existing "default.dat" file, select the folder that contains the "default.dat" file which should
be edited.
6. Click the Start button. The window title shows "WinCTX is running."
7. If you click "No," the second screen displays (see previous page).
If a "default.dat"file exists in the selected folder,
the window (shown right) displays:
¥ Click Yes to load the "default.dat" file into
WinCTX. WinCTX shows "Restoring," as it loads
the existing default.dat.
If a "default.dat" file is not in the selected folder,
the "Load default.dat?" screen does not appear and
WinCTX immediately displays the "WinCTX is
7059
running" screen. You can still connect to WinCTX
to create a new default.dat file in the selected
folder by continuing with the following steps.
8. With WinCTX running, log on to WinAdmin.
·
Enter CTX IP/Name (IP address): 127.0.0.1 or your local PC's IP address.
·
Enter a Community Name (CTX default is "communityName").
9. Click the Connect Now button. WinAdmin should connect to WinCTX and operate exactly as if it were
connected to a CTX system.
Note In the PC Local Area Connection Property Settings, you may need to set the PC Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) properties to use the following IP address: 192.168.254.251. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0.
10.Make your offline programming changes from WinAdmin.
11. When you are done programming, select Operation > Data Backup. Click the Back Up button. When
you see "Completed Successfully," it is done. This will create a new "default.dat" file that contains your
programming changes.
Important!
Data changes will not be stored in the default.dat file unless you backup your data using
WinAdmin.
12.Log out of WinAdmin and then bring up the WinCTX application screen and click the Stop button to
stop WinCTX (see "Stopping WinCTX").
13.To transfer the WinCTX database to a CTX system, locate the "default.dat" file in the folder previously
selected in Step 4.
14.Transfer the "default.dat" file to a SmartMedia card (progdata folder) in the CTX, either locally or
remotely, and then restore the data to the CTX using the system initialization procedure (Program 900
level 1). See Chapter 10Operation, "900 CTX Restart."
3-24
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Installation
WinCTX Offline Programming CTX R2.21 MH108
Stopping WinCTX
1. Click the Stop button or click
the
button in the right corner.
WinCTX displays window
(shown right).
2. Click Yes to stop WinCTX
...or click No to continue using
WinCTX.
Important!
Data changes will not be stored in the default.dat file unless you backup your data using
WinAdmin.
Viewing the CTX Release Number Supported by WinCTX
To display the CTX release number supported by WinCTX, open WinCTX and click on the WinCTX icon
in the left corner, then click on the "version number WinCTXxxx." The CTX release (R2.21) and build
(MH109 or MH110) number that WinCTX will emulate when it is running displays.
When you run WinCTX, it always shows the same CTX release and build information even if you open a
default.dat file with different release and build numbers. You can restore the "default.dat" files created by
Inst
WinCTX to CTX systems with different release numbers per the rules below.
allation
Rules for Opening/Restoring "default.dat files"
Basically when opening and restoring default.dat files using WinCTX, the version of WinCTX must match
the version of CTX. If the version numbers do not match, data errors will ocuur after updating the CTX
using the default.dat file created or edited using WinCTX. WinCTX R2.21 MH109 or MH110 can only be
used CTX R2.21 MH109 or MH110. If MH014 is released it may be compatible with WinCTX R2.21
MH109 or MH110 this will be specified in the MH014 release documentation.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
3-25

Installation
WinCTX Offline Programming CTX R2.21 MH108
3-26
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
4
This chapter provides Strata CTX system programming information for programmers using the CTX
WinAdmin programming interface.
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
All Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), excluding the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots. The
processor PCBs have dedicated slots in the Base Cabinet which do not require this assignment. The system
provides one Base Cabinet and up to six Expansion Cabinets. The Base Cabinet provides eight slots and
each of the six Expansion Cabinets provide 10 slots for a total of 68 slots.
1. Fill out the "Card Assignment Record Sheets" on page D-1.
2. From the Program Menu click System >
Card Assignment. The Card Slot
Assignment screen displays (shown
right).
3. Cabinet (01~07) Select the two digit
cabinet number to be assigned. The
cabinet and slot number appear in the
Syst
cab/slot field. Select 01 for Base and
em
Expansion cabinet (CTX100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07
respectively for each Expansion cabinet
(CTX670).
4. Slot (01~10) Select 01~04 for Base
Slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base Slots and 01~10
for Expansion Slots (CTX670).
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, BIOU2 is
installed as default in a virtual equipment position; Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20 in Program 100.
To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal
manner.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-1

System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
5. Select the PCB Type. Use the drop down menu to select the PCB type. WinAdmin will start a refresh
cycle, watch the progress bar (lower right corner of PC screen) to verify when WinAdmin is complete.
The PCB type that was selected will appear in the PCB Type field.
6. Click Submit to save your data.
Notes
·
CTX100 ASTU is always installed in virtual slot 09, as shown below .
Only ASTU shows
for Slot 9
7377
·
CTX28 the slots will always be populated as shown below and cannot be changed.
7447
4-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
Dial Number Plan
Dial Number Plan
Prerequisite Program: None
The Dial Number Plan lets you download all
current dialing numbers registered in the CTX
database.
The Numbering Plan screen (shown right) gives
you details on the different categories of
Numbers.
The table below contains the information shown
on the screen to the right.
Number Type
Description
Digit Groups
Lists all numbers that begin with each digit 0~9 separately.
DKT Prime DNs
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a digital telephone in Program 200.
SLT Prime DNs
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a standard telephone in Program 200.
ISDN DNs
Lists all Directory Numbers assigned to ISDN telephones in Program 202.
Phantom DNs
Lists all Phantom Directory Numbers assigned to digital telephones, Add-On-Modules
and DSS consoles in Programs 205, 213, 215 respectively.
IPT Prime DNs
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-M card in Program 200 (requires
CTX and WinAdmin Release 2.1 and above).
ACD Pilot
Lists all ACD Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 540.
Syst
Hunt Group Pilot
Lists all Hunt Group Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 209.
em
Access Codes
Lists all feature, line and line group access codes assigned in Program 102.
¥ Click Continue to view the next screen.
To the right is an example of all the
numbers programmed in the CTX
system.
You are able to view all the DNs, IPT
DNs and other numbers used.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-3

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
102 Flexible Access Codes
Prerequisite Program: None
Strata CTX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access features.
This enables you to create customized Flexible Access Codes. The Strata CTX Flexible Numbering Plan
associates features stored in memory (i.e., "Store Code," see Table 4-1) to a Flexible Numbering Code
assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.
1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the "Programmed Value" column of Table 4-1.
2. From the Program Menu click
System > Flexible Numbering
Plan. The Numbering Plan
Assignment screen displays
(shown at right).
3. 00 Flexible Numbering Plan
Enter the digits to be dialed
(0~9,#,*) to access a feature or an
OLG. To delete, select "No Data"
in "01 Feature Name." Conflict
with an assigned DN will produce
an error.
4. 01 Flexible Numbering Feature
Select the Flexible Numbering
Feature (see Table 4-1) to see
which access code is being
assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select "Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG." To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select "Line access code -
leading digit(s) to access individual lines". Example: If #7 is selected as the line access prefix, the
users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the line number).
5. 02 OLG Number Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is being
assigned. This field is only required if you chose "Line Group Access Code one access code for each
OLG" for the Flexible Numbering Feature in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field if a Feature Code other
than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number (0~32 CTX100; 0~50 CTX670 Basic; 0~128 CTX670 Expanded) field appears
only when 01 Feature Name Line Group Access Code one access code for each OLG is selected.
6. Click Submit.
¥ To delete an access code assignment
¥ Click the Create button and enter the access code in the index, select No Assignment, click Submit.
This clears the access code so that you can reassign it to another feature.
4-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Creating New Feature Codes
1. Click on the Create button.
2. Enter new feature/access code. Click Ok. WinAdmin will start a refresh cycle, when your complete
screen will change to a gray (edit mode) color and the feature/access code will be red.
3. From the Feature Name drop down menu select the feature to be assigned.
4. Submit your data.
Notes
·
To range program feature/access codes use a "*" between a range of values and a "," for an additional
entry not in a range.
·
System Date and Time Access Codes These functions require CTX R1.02, MA227 or higher
software. The system date adjust code and system time adjust code is different for every system. The
defaults are #651 and #652 respectively.
Important!
If you backup a CTX database (default.dat) with a CTX software that does not support Time/
Date access codes and then restore it to a CTX software that supports these access codes,
you must use this program to set the Time/Date access codes. This must be done to allow end
users to set the Time/Date from their LCD digital telephones.
Flexible Numbering Default Settings
Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code relationships.
Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to directly access the Flexible
Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD of the telephone once the Default
Access Codes are entered.
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit
Button Codes.
Syst
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
em
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
No Data
ABR - Activate
150
Æ##
ABR - Cancel
151
Æ##!
Call Park Orbits - Activate
170
Æ""
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call)
173
Æ"!
System Orbit Number
174
&& (
DND -Local Activation
180
Æ%(
DND -Local Cancellation
181
Æ%(!
DND -Remote Activation
182
Æ% (
DND -Remote Cancellation
183
Æ% (!
Door Lock Control -Unlock
190
Æ !
Door Phones -Call
191
Æ $
Flash -short
200
Æ#$
Flash -long
210
Æ#$
Group Paging -Invoke All Group Paging
220
Æ"
Group Paging -Invoke Individual Group Paging
230
Æ"
Answer for External Group Paging
232
Æ$Æ"%
Emergency Page -Invoke All Emergency Paging
240
Æ"&
Emergency Page -Invoke Individual Emergency Paging
250
Æ"'
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99)
260

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-5

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099)
261
!
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199)
262
"
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299)
263
#
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399)
264
$
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499)
265
%
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599)
266
&
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699)
267
'
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799)
268
(
Register Speed Dial
269
Æ%%
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation
340
Æ%
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation
341
Æ%!
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation
342
Æ%"
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation
343
Æ%#
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation
350
Æ% "
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation
351
Æ%!"
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation
352
Æ%""
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation
353
Æ%#"
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation
360
Æ% !
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation
361
Æ%!!
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
362
Æ%"!
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
363
Æ%#!
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation
370
Æ% #
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation
371
Æ%!#
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
372
Æ%"#
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
373
Æ%##
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation
380
Æ%$
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation
390
Æ%$"
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation
400
Æ%$!
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation
410
Æ%$#
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation
420
Æ%&
Input Account Code
530
Æ#%
Change DISA Security Code
540
Æ%$'
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk
550
Æ&
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group
551
Ir
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection)
560
Æ#(#
Enter User Programming Mode
570
Æ('&%
LCR -Outgoing Call
580
(
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM)
591
Æ%"
Release Received Message Waiting
592
Æ#(
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM))
593
Æ%#
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting)
594
Æ#'
Cancel ACB
600
Æ#"
Start BGM
610
Æ#(
Stop BGM
611
Æ#(
Start BGM for External Paging Device
612
Æ#(!
Stop BGM for External Paging Device
613
Æ#("
Built-in modem
630
Æ (
Night Ring Answer
640
Æ$Æ"(
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number
650
Æ#&
Change Travelling Class Override Code
651
Æ%(
4-6
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
Activate System Call Forward
670
Æ%!
Cancel System Call Forward
671
Æ%!
Call Pickup -Directed DN Pickup of Ringing or Held DN calls and Call Park
678
Æ$Æ!(
Answer
Call Pickup1 - Directed DN pickup for either Ringing or Held Calls (Release
679
Æ$Æ%
2.0, MF017 or higher)
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup
680
Æ$Æ"#
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal
681
Æ$Æ$
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group
682
Æ$Æ"!
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN
683
Æ$Æ!!
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call
684
Æ$Æ(
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve
685
Æ$Æ&"
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve
686
Æ$Æ&
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve
687
Æ$Æ&!
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve
688
Æ$Æ&#
Transfer to Voice Mail
690
Æ#&
Repeat Last Number Dialed
700

Volume Control for BEEP
710
Æ%
Change LCD Display Language
720
Æ#($
Advisory Message - Activation
730
Æ#
Advisory Message - Cancellation
731
Æ# !
Emergency Call
740
Æ(
Attendant Console Group Access Code
750

Operator Call Special Dial (for Tenant Service)
751
Private Network Access Code
760
'
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix)
770
Ir
Substitution of Dial *
780
##
Substitution of Dial #
781
##
Syst
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call
782
ÆÆ
em
Application starting access code
800
Æ '
Split (Conference)
860
'%
Voice Mail Call Monitor Off
870
Æ(%"
System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)
910
Æ%$
System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)
911
Æ%$!
1. Feature key is not provided for this Call Pickup. If you want a feature key, please use Single Touch Button that has
a feature access code for this call pickup.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-7

System
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by sending tones
directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in PSTN
numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix "1" would be expected to be 11 digits long. Calls will
be cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been received.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Public Numbering Plan.
The Public numbering Plan
Analyzed Digit Number
Assignment screen displays (shown
at right).
2. Enter the Prefix Number used for
external calls.
3. Select Digits to Follow.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Prefix Number
Enter the initial, identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild cards
"X" and "N".
Possible values: 1~7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)
01 Digits to Follow
Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established above. It is
the total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix Number above.
Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)
4-8
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
103 Class of Service
103 Class of Service
Prerequisite Program: None
Class of Service (COS) assignments are a registration of feature capabilities to a specific user or group of
users. Up to 32 COS feature sets can be registered.
1. Enter your COS assignments in the "COS
Record Sheet" on page D-4.
2. From the Program Menu click System >
Class of Service The Class of Service
Assignment screen displays (shown
right).
3. COS Number Select the COS Number
(1~32).
4. Place a check mark in each of the
services you wish to enable.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Auto Busy Redial
Enable Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside destination.
Syst
02 Call Forward Override
Enable Call Forward Override. If enabled, this station does not forward
calls from a calling station with System or Station Call Forward
em
activated. This includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button
located on the telephone or DSS console.
03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on
Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy destination.
04 Change DISA Codes
Enable stations to change the DISA Security Code.
05 DND Override - Calling Party
Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.
06 DND Override - Called Party
Permits calling parties with DND Override privileges to override DND
status.
07 Do Not Disturb
Enables user to place stations on DND mode.
08 Remote Set/Reset DND
Enables stations with the ability to set/reset DND on other phones.
09 Executive Override
Enable Executive Override on a call.
10 Executive Override Allowed
Permit Executive Override for incoming callers.
11 Offhook Camp-on
Enable Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.
12 Group Pickup
Enable stations for Group Call Pickup within one's own group.
13 Directed Station Pickup
Enable stations to pick another specific ringing station.
14 Directed Group Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-9

System
103 Class of Service
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Directed DN Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up a specified DN.
16 Ext Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.
17 Directed CO Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.
18 Remote Retrieve Call Pickup
Enable stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated
terminal (PDN).
19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup
Enable stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.
20 Handsfree Override
Permit stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing mode.
21 Privacy Override
Enable stations to override a private call.
23 Invoke Emergency Page
Enable the Emergency Page feature.
Note
Not used in Release 1.
24 Join Feature
Enable the Join feature (Attendant Feature).
25 Through Dialing
Enable the Perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature).
26 Tandem CO Connection
Set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.
27 Day/Night Control
Enable Day/Night Mode changing privilege.
28 Ext BGM Control
Permit BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.
29 LCR Feature
Enable access to LCR.
30 Individual Trunk Access
Enable Dial individual trunk access codes to access specific lines.
31 Trunk Access Allowed
Enable Access trunk groups by trunk access codes.
32 Forced Account Codes
Use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
33 Verified Account Codes
Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.
34 Allow Short Hook Flash
Use a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
35 Allow Long Hook Flash
Use a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
36 Allow Hook Flash
Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and voice
mail ports to perform hook flashes.
38 Can Receive OCA
Permission for others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.
39 LCR on Direct Trunk Access
Sets whether LCR should be used if trunk is accessed directly -
Available in R2
40 Disconnect Outgoing Call
If this parameter is enable for a level of Class of Service, COS, any O/G
calls made by Extensions with this COS will be automatically released
after a defined time period. Time period defined in Program 104.
41 BGM Enable
Disable to remove Background Music from stations with this COS.
42 DSS Override Call Fwd
Enable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key, the
called station will NOT call forward if Call Forward is set. When calling
stations using the dial pad the called tation's Call Forward will occur.
Disable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key, the
called station will call forward if Call Forward is set. When calling
stations using the dial pad the called station's Call Forward will occur
4-10
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
104 System Timer
104 System Timer
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features
for the Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > System Timer. System
Timer Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Select the desired timer value for
each of the 19 fields.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 ACB Callback Timer
The Automatic Callback timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 seconds) that the callback will
be attempted before being cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 sec. (default = 30)
02 ACB Cancel Recall
Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a limit for registering a
Timer
callback. Once the timer expires, the callback will be cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 min. (default = 30)
03 Park Recall Timer
Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in Park.
Syst
Possible values: 10~600 sec. (default = 120)
em
04 Camp-on Timer
Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook prior to
Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values: 5~15 sec. (default = 10)
05 SMDR Valid Call Timer
The length of time that a call should be active before being captured by SMDR. The
SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing call will be considered
to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from
the public network. Setting the too time short will include calls that may not be
completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are answered and
terminated in a short time.
Possible values: 0~180 sec. (default = 10)
06 Tandem Timer #1
Select timer for a Trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user monitoring has taken place.
Possible values: 0~3600 sec. (default = 300)
07 Tandem Timer #2
Provides the time to enable an external user to dial a digit to extend the disconnect
time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used primarily with DISA.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
08 Call Forward No Ans
The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a phone will
Time
ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 30)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-11

System
104 System Timer
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 Dial Input Timer
Permits dialed input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 sec. (default = 20)
10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer
Specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer
Selects the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
12 Door Unlock Timer
Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing the lock.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 6)
13 9+11 Judgement Timer
The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value (1~30 seconds) for the system to
wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for
treatment using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)
14 Emergency Call Timer
Sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the
call.
Possible values: 10~180 sec. (default = 30)
15 ABR Busy Detection
The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for a busy
Time
condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic
Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)
16 Lost Call Timer
The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 180)
17 Lost Call Final Timer
The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 30)
18 DTMF Tone Sending
The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO Lines.
Time
Possible values: 80msec (default) or 160msec
19 Auto Disconnect
Time after which an unsupervised trunk may be automatically released.
Possible values: 0~60 min. (default = 0)
20 Tie Line Delay Timer
This timer inserts a pause before any dialled information is sent to a Tie Line, this
pause
allows the distant end time to prepare for the receipt of dialled digits.
21 Answer timer before
If an incoming DISA call routes over a Tie Line and the call is not answered by the
disconnect
distant end within a certain period of time the DISA caller will be cut off. The time
period before cut off is determined by this setting.
22 Outgoing Call Talking
If Program 103 FB40 is set to enable then after this timer expires the out going call is
Disconnect Timer
cut off
4-12
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
23 System Timer Network
Select Network DSS Refresh Timer (20 -180 seconds). The time interval when all
DSS Refresh Timer
Network DSS settings are refreshed system wide.
Note
DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status of the DSS
button changes - regardless of this timer value.
Possible values: 20~180 seconds (default = 30)
24 Outgoing Number
This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone LCDs for outgoing
Display Timer
line calls. (This feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values:1~120 seconds (default = 10)
105 System Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns system settings for your Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > System Data. The
System Data Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter System Parameter data
using the table below.
3. Click Submit.
Syst
em
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Executive Override
Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 Station MOH
Select MOH for private lines and stations.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1 (default), External 2, External 3, External
4, External 5, External 6, External 7, External 8, External 9,
External 10, External 11, External 12, External 13, External 14 or
External 15
03 Ring Transfer Tone
Select tones for the transferred party to hear after a ringing transfer takes place.
Possible values: RBT (default) or MOH
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-13

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Transfer Privacy
Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will only
flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone; the same CO line button on other
telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will flash
and ring on all telephones that have the CO line button appearance.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
05 Privacy Override
Enable Privacy Override Attendant Monitor warning.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Credit Card Code
Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this field
any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
07 Credit Card Digits
Enter the Minimum Dial Digits for Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: 1~66 (default = 21)
08 E911 Service
Enable E911 Service availability.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
09 DR Override by SSD
Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Auto Station Release
Enable Automatic Station Release.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 ISDN SPID
Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).
Possible values: Operable or Not Operable (default)
12 Night Mode Relay
Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the system is in
the Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note
On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2, Slot 5,
PCB code 20.
13 BGM External Paging
Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging zones to
which BGM will be sent. See Program 503
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX670 Expanded) (default = 0)
14 Lost Call Destination
Enter Lost Call Destination. If no value is entered in this field any previously
programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
15 COS Override Code
Class of Service Override Code Digits (1-8 digits). The digit length of COS override
codes. COS override codes are set in Program 510.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
4-14
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
16 Multi-Conference
Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing Calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
17 Caller Number Display
Enable Caller Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller ID, the
Caller ID displays.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
18 Night Bell Relay
Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Bell Relay; this relay activates whenever Night
Ringing takes place.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note
On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2 Slot 5,
PCB code 20.
19 Display Preference
Select Display Preference.
Possible values: DNIS (default) or Caller ID
20 Transit Counter
Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of nodes
through which a QSIG call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 1)
21 Primary Clock
Enter data as xxyyzz.
22 Secondary Clock
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03, or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be a assigned to an RPTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
Syst
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
em
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
23 Call History Prefix 1
Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values: Add (default) or Do Not Add
24 Emergency Digits Sent
Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this field any
previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = 911)
25 DP Make Ratio
Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.
Possible values: 33% (default) or 40%
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-15

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
26 Call Button Jumping
Select whether to execute Jumping LED.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
·
If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after they
are answered. After answering the call, the DN button is cleared to receive
another call.
With Call Jumping, the DN acts as an Answer button. This only applies if the line
that is answered has a CO/GCO/Pooled button appearance on the telephone.
·
If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they are answered.
27 Set Domestic Code
Set to 0 (zero) to enable CTX/CIX to insert the leading zero when receiving a
National CLI
29 CPN Numbering Plan
Called Party Number numbering plan format.
Possible values: Unknown (default) or ISDN
30 SLT Recall Timer
Hooking = 100mS On_Off Hook = 500mS <<investigate>>
31 Analog Trunk Hunting
This parameter defines the order in which analog trunks are selected during the
outgoing call trunk selection process.
Possible values: Terminal (default) or Cyclical
32 Display Check Sum
Enable a System Checksum error to be displayed and an error log to be created.
Error
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Enable a System Checksum error to be displayed and an error log to be created.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
33 Analog Tie Line
Analog Tie Line Disconnect Timer enables tandem analog Tie Lines to automatically
Disconnect Timer
disconnect if the timer expires.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
34 Analog DID Method
Analog DID method: Normal(DTMF)/MFC-R2 3 digits/MFC-R2 4 digits
Possible values: Normal (default), MFC-R2 3, MFC-R2 3
35 ALaw/MuLaw
Choose the companding technique appropriate to the local PSTN. Mu Law in North
America.
Possible values: A Law or Mu Law (default)
36 Play Melody
Possible values: Start or Stop (default)
37 Select Melody
Possible values: Melody 1 (default) or Melody 2
38 Internal Pad
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
4-16
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
39 Std. Tel. Ringing
Select the Ringing Cadence for Standard Telephone circuits. This parameter is
Cadence
available only with CTX WinAdmin R2.1 and above.
Note
This does not apply to Digital to IP telephones.
(Ringing Type1)
External Ring:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec.ON - 0.2sec. OFF
- 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 1sec. OFF
(Ringing Type2)
'Ringing Type2' is the same Ringing Cadence as DK.
External Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec. ON - 0.2sec. OFF
- 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 1sec.ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
40 Sys CF Cascade
Enable: A call that forwards to a destination that is also System Call forwarded, will
be sent to the destinations System Call Forward destination.
Note
Note: If enabled, the SCF alternate destination set in Prg 500-05 will be
ignored.
Disable: A call that forwards to a destination that is System Call Forwarded, will not
follow the destinations System Call Forward.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
41 CSTA B-Ch. Operation
Enabled - CSTA shall provide full 'B' Channel path information. Disabled - CSTA
shall provide channel group only.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
42 ISDN Complete IE
Whether to append Sending Complete IE into SETUP message and INFO message
Option
in ISDN.
Syst
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
em
43 Repeat Last No. Dialed
Enable - to store dialed numbers that are not complete in the last number dialed
buffer.
Disable - to only store complete telephone numbers in the last number dialed buffer.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
44 Default Calling Number
Enabled - the system will send the default Calling Number to the PSTN when
stations make ISDN calls in the local node.
Disable -the system will not send the default Callling number to the PSTN on ISDN
calls in the local node.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
45 DSS Ringing Indication
Select whether DSS LEDs should flash red or not light when their respective
Directory Numbers are ringing.
Ringing - DSS LEDs flash red when their respective Directory Numbers are ringing.
Idle - DSS LEDS are idle (not lit) when their respective Directory Numbers are
ringing.
Possible values: Ringing (default) or Idle
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-17

System
System Call Forward
System Call Forward
Program Number(s): 500 and 504
Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs.
1. Complete the "System Call Forward
Record Sheets" on page D-6.
2. From the Program Menu, click System >
System Call Forward. The System Call
Forward Destination screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 500 data.
4. Enter Program 504 data.
5. Click Submit.
500 System Call Forward Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are assigned to
these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and Telephone
Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are set.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Number
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100), 1~10 (CTX670 Basic),
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Call Type
Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values: CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)
02 Period
Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values: Day1, Day2 or Night (default = no value)
03 Telephone Status
Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values: Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND (default = no value)
04 Destination 1
Select the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 Destination 2
Select an alternate destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
4-18
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
System Call Forward
504 System Call Forward Operation Status
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns System Call Forward (SCF) Type for the pattern.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Number
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100), 1~10 (CTX670 Basic),
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Telephone Status
Select the status or state in which the telephone should be for this system call
forward pattern to activate.
Possible values: No Data (default), Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND
System Call Forward Copy
The copy function enables you to selectively copy SCF destinations to any or all SCF segments and any or
all SCF templates. It combines Program 500 and Program 504 on the same screen.
Note They were separate screens in previous versions of CTX WinAdmin.
1. Select System > System Call Forward > a SCF template (1-32) and then a Telephone Status (example
"Busy No Answer"). The System Call Forward screen displays (shown above) showing the status of the
first available call forwarding system.
2. Select the needed values from the drop-down menus for the System Call Forward and Telephone Status
fields. These fields are required. As soon as the second field is selected, the full page displays for
editing.
Note If it is not yet configured, the Telephone Status field indicates No Forwarding.
3. Select Call Type and Period by highlighting the desired line in the display.
Syst
4. Type the needed information into the Destination 1 and 2 fields. Destination 1 is always required,
em
Destination 2 is optional.
5. Click Submit to send the data to the CTX.
6. Click Submit to send the destination assignments to the CTX
...or click Copy to display the Copy dialog box. You can click on Copy at any time to copy Destinations
to any SCF template, Call type and period, including all SCF segments and templates.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-19

System
System Call Forward Table View
Copy Dialog Box
¥ To copy SCF Destinations to any selected SCF assignment
click Copy on the System Call Forward screen. The System
Call Forward Range Copy screen displays (shown right).
¥ To select the Destination(s) that should be copied
1. You can remove a destination entry by removing the
checkmark from it.
2. Select the appropriate Period, Call type, Status and SCF
assignments to which the destination(s) should be copied.
3. Click Copy Now. Your entries are submitted to the CTX and
the destination(s) are copied to all assignments that you
selected.
Possible Errors
·
If you attempt to remove Destination1 (only) when there is a
Destination2 assigned.
·
If you attempt to assign Destination2 when Destination1 is not assigned.
Notes
·
If you check "Prompt on Error," the copy function stops if one of the above errors occurs, then you are
given a choice to continue or abort. Continue skips the error and does not perform the copy.
·
If you do not check "Prompt on Error," all errors, if any, are skipped and the copy is not executed.
·
You can assign or remove both destinations at the same time without causing an error.
System Call Forward Table View
SCF Table View shows the entire set up of
all available system call forward levels.
¥ To access the SCF Table View
¥ Select System > SCF Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-8 for table
functionality.
4-20
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
501 System Speed Dial
501 System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits. If the
number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to
create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the number for dialing a
common routine with the number (see "516 Station Speed Dial" on page 5-35 for more information about
nesting).
1. Complete the "System Speed Dial
Record Sheet" on page D-7.
2. From the Program Menu, click System >
System Speed Dial. The System Speed
Dial screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 501 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Speed Dial Bin
Enter the speed dial bin location.
Possible values: 000~799 (default = no value)
Syst
01 Number
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
em
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds), which is the length of
the pause.
02 Name
This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-21

System
System Speed Dial Table View
System Speed Dial Table View
System Speed Dial Table View
shows the entire set up for all
speed dial numbers.
¥ To access the System Speed Dial
Table View
¥ Select System > System Speed
Dial Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-8
for table functionality.
Day Night Service
Program Number(s): 112, 106 and 113
The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CTX.
1. Complete the "Day/Night Mode
Record Sheet" on page D-8.
2. From the Program Menu click
System > Day Night Services. The
Day Night Mode Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Calendar Day
(YYYYMMDD) to assign a
Working Day Type schedule
...or click on one of the following
buttons.
·
List View a summary list of
programmed Calendar days.
·
Create Assign a new Calendar
Day with custom settings.
·
Copy Copies the currently
viewed record to another record(s).
4. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
5. Enter Program 106 data.
6. Enter Program 113 data.
7. Click Submit.
4-22
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
Day Night Service
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
Prerequisite Program: 106 on page 4-23
This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days. These
settings override the default system schedules in Strata CTX to enable Day/Night scheduling for unique
circumstances.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values:1~8.
00 Calendar Day
Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no value)
01 Working Day Type
Select the Working Day Type.
Possible values: Delete (default), Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday
106 Day/Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 113 on page 4-24
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These types of
days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Syst
Possible values:1~8.
em
01 Monday
Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the week.
Possible values: Work Day (default), Non-work Day or Holiday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the weekend.
Possible values: Work Day, Non-work Day (default) or Holiday
07 Sunday
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-23

System
Day Night Service
113 Day/Night Mode Schedule per Tenant Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work Day, and
Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night) per Tenant. Each "type of day" defined in "106 Day/
Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment" on page 4-23 requires an assigned schedule.
Complete "Day/Night Mode Record Sheet" on page D-8.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.).
Possible values:1~8.
Work Day
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
·
01 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
·
02 Day2 Mode
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
·
03 Night Mode
Non-Work Day
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
·
04 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
·
05 Day2 Mode
Note
Enter 9999 deletes or skip modes.
·
06 Night Mode
Holiday
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
·
07 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
·
08 Day2 Mode
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
·
09 Night Mode
4-24
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
PAD Table
PAD Table
Program Number(s): 107, 108 and 114
Assign PAD groups, PAD tables and PAD conference tables using these programs.
1. From the Program Menu click System >
PAD Table. The PAD Table Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.
Note Clicking *Note displays Table 4-2 for
Program 107 and Table 4-3 for Program
108.
5699
107 PAD Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Sender PAD Device
Enter Sender PAD device or group number. See Table 4-2 or use drop-down menu.
Number
Possible values: Up to 3 digits. (default = no value.)
1~10 (PAD device number)
Syst
101~106 (CTX100 - PAD group number)
101~110 (CTX670 - PAD group number)
em
101~132 (CTX670 Expanded - PAD group number)
02 Receiver PAD Device
Enter Receiver PAD device or group number. See Table 4-2 or use drop-down menu.
Number
Possible values: Up to 3 digits. (default = no value.)
1~10 (PAD device number)
101~106 (CTX100 - PAD group number)
101~110 (CTX670 - PAD group number)
101~132 (CTX670 Expanded - PAD group number)
03 PAD Loss
Enter PAD Value (see Table 4-2 or use the drop-down menu). The value shown
represents the net effect.
Note
To PAD is to insert loss; therefore, "negative loss" equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Loss
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-25

System
PAD Table
Program 107 PAD Table Example
If the Sender is an analog telephone (PAD device number 1) and the receiver is a T1 trunk (PAD device
number 4), then the PAD value is 6. (6 = 9dB Net Loss).
PAD group numbers are assigned in Program 108 PAD Group Assignment.
Table 4-2
Program 107 PAD Table
PAD Device or Group Number of Receiver (Listener)
one
32
ph
n
e
le
g
rce
e
runk
tio
id
ng
up 1
up 2
up 3
up 1
k
..
ta
runk
o
o
o
o
Sou
og T
og T
run
S
c
N
si
. Pagi
D
DN T
u
T
AD Gr
AD Gr
AD Gr
AD Gr
Anal
DKT
Anal
T1 T
IS
IS
CONF Br
M
Ext
IP
P
P
P
P
PAD Device No. of
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
..
Sender (Speaker)
10
101
102
103
132
1
Analog Telephone
0
0
0
6
6
6
X1
-
0
0
0
0
2
DKT
0
0
0
6
6
6
0
-
0
0
0
0
3
Analog Trunk
0
0
6
6
6
6
X1
-
6
0
0
0
4
T1 Trunk
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
3
0
0
5
ISDN Station
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
3
0
0
6
ISDN Trunk
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
3
0
0
7
Conference Bridge
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
0
0
0
8
Music Source
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
Ext. Paging
0
0
6
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
IPT
-6
0
-6
0
0
0
-6
-
-6
0
0
0
1012 PAD Group 1
(IP QSIG only)3
0
0
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
0
0
0
PAD Group 2
102
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
(ISDN PRI QSIG only)
103
PAD Group 3
:
:
132
PAD Group 32
PAD values
1. "X" data set for PAD Conference Table Assignment.
2. These are recommended channel group PAD numbers, but they can be changed in Program 302 PRI and IP QSIG.
3. For IP QSIG only. The default values for PAD Group 1 is 0dB. dB is the value for attenuation level.
4-26
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
PAD Table
108 PAD Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
You can enter up to 32 additional devices to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 PAD Group Device Type
Enter the Device Type.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits. See Table 4-3 for device type and number.
x = Device Type
y = Device number (1~5 digits)
(default = no value)
01 PAD Group Number
Enter the PAD Group Number.
Possible values: 0~6 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Table 4-3
Program 108 PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device
Device Number
Device Name
Type
Example
(y)
(x)
DKT, SLT, ISDN, IPT Station
1
0~99999 (PDN)
if DKT device = 200, value = 1200.
ISDN or IP QSIG
1~128 (Channel Group No. per
2
if Channel Group # = 10, value = 210.
Channel Group
Prog. 302)
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk
3
1~264 (Trunk Number)
if Trunk # = 120, value = 3120.
none (Conference Bridge is only
Conference Bridge
4
value = 4.
one)
Syst
Music Source
5
1~15 (Music Port)
if Music port = 8, value = 58.
em
External Paging Device
6
1~8 (Zone Relay Number)
if External Paging Device = 3, value = 63.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-27

System
PAD Table
114 PAD Conference Assignment
This program enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and telephones in
conference.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PAD Conference Trunks
Enter the number of analog trunks using Table 4-4 below.
Possible values: 0~6 (default = 0)
02 PAD Conference
Enter the number of analog telephones. See Table 4-4 below.
Telephone
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
03 PAD Conference Value
Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and
telephones specified in PAD Conference Trunks and Telephones above. The
value shown shows the net effect.
Note
To pad is to insert loss; therefore, "negative loss" equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Los
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value).
Table 4-4
Program 114 PAD Conference Table
Number of Analog Telephones
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
6
6
og
1
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
6
2
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
Anal
s
3
6
6
6
6
6
9
r ofe runk
b
T
4
9
9
9
9
9
m
5
9
9
9
9
Nu
6
9
9
9
4-28
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
110 Password
110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels for. Logging into the system
with the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the level 2 password
provides restricted program administration.
1. From the Program Menu click System >
Password.
2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Click Submit.
6212
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Password Level
Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password as follows:
Possible values: Enter 1 to set the unrestricted administration password.
Enter 2 to set a restricted administration password.
Syst
Level 2 users can administer all programs but are restricted from
initializing the CTX and from updating the CTX software
em
(default = no value).
01 Password
Enter the desired password.
Note
Only one password can be set for each level.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-29

System
109 Music on Hold
109 Music on Hold
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Music on Hold. The
External Music on Hold Source
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. For fields 01~07, click in the
adjacent radio button to activate
MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the
equipment location identifier and
check the Connected box to
activate.
4. Click Submit.
5701
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
MOH/BGM #1 (BECU)
For MOH/BGM #1~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the
specified PCB.
MOH/BGM #2 (BIOU1-J1)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
MOH/BGM #3 (BIOU1-J2)
MOH/BGM #4 (BIOU1-J3)
MOH/BGM #5 (BIOU2-J1)
MOH/BGM #6 (BIOU2-J2)
MOH/BGM #7 (BIOU2-J3)
MOH/BGM #8 (RSTU)
Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8 or #9~#15
are connected. Enter data as xxyyzz:
MOH/BGM #9 (RSTU)
Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU in cabinet
MOH/BGM #10 (RSTU)
5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
MOH/BGM #11 (RSTU)
A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a MOH
MOH/BGM #12 (RSTU)
circuit. If a PDN is assigned to the circuit that will connect to a MOH/BGM
source, you must first delete it using PRG201
MOH/BGM #13 (RSTU)
Cabinet numbers:
MOH/BGM #14 (RSTU)
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
MOH/BGM #15 (RSTU)
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Notes
·
A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a
MOH circuit.
·
If a PDN is assigned to an MOH/BGM circuit, you must first delete the PDN
using PRG201
4-30
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
I/O Device
I/O Device
Program Number(s): 803, 801 and 804
These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical Devices
SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 803 data.
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
This program assigns one of the following:
·
SMDR and Toshiba Proprietary Integration (TPI) to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
·
WinAdmin, ACD server, TPI and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device and LAN
port numbers.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Logical Device Number
Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices or
Syst
Network application. See Table 4-5.
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
em
200~208 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value)
300 = SMDI of TPI
400 = BLF (for CTX Attendant Console)
500 = DSS (for Telephone, DSS Console, and ADM DSS
buttons)
Note
BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
01 Device Connection
1. Select RS-232 for SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs. These devices are connected
to BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Select LAN for WinAdmin, ACD Server, TPI, and Attendant Console PC. These
devices are connected to the BECU Network Jack directly or via a HUB or LAN.
Possible values: None (default), LAN or RS-232
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-31

System
I/O Device
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Device Port No.
Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values: For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
For BLF Networking: 11
For DSS Networking: 12
Notes
· SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
· BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and
with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
· LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according to the
following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206
LAN Port8 = device207
Table 4-5
Device Table
Physical Device
Define I/O
Logical
Logical Device
Logical
Device
Serial Number
Smart
LAN
PPP
RS-232C
Device
Media
Number
SMDR
0
-
-
OK
-
100
0
OK
-
-
-
200
1
OK
-
-
-
201
2
OK
-
-
-
202
3
OK
-
-
-
203
CTI
4
OK
-
-
-
204
5
OK
-
-
-
205
6
OK
-
-
-
206
7
OK
-
-
-
207
8
OK
-
-
-
208
0
OK
-
OK
-
300
SMDI
1
OK
-
OK
-
301
4-32
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
I/O Device
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 803 on page 4-31 and 804 on page 4-34.
This screen assigns Strata CTX LAN
parameters, enabling PC applications
to connect to the BECU network jack.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays.
2. Click the LAN Device tab. 801
Network Jack LAN Device
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 801 data.
6538
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 LAN Port Number
Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned. Refer to "803 SMDR SMDI CTI
Port Assignments" on page 4-31.
Possible values: 1~12 (default = no value)
Notes
·
Program the local port number for LCD Control of Voice Mail
·
Use the same Device Port No. (11) for Network BLF.
·
Use 10 for Network TPI
·
Use 12 for Network DSS
·
Network BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
01 Protocol
Select communication Protocol.
Syst
Possible values: TCP (default) or UDP
em
Note
Select UDP for Network DSS.
02 PC Operation Type
Select the Operation Type.
·
If Server is selected, enter 04 Server Port Number.
·
If Client is selected, enter the 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: Server (default) or Client
Note
Select Client for TPI.
03 Data Flow
Select the data flow protocol for CTX and PC communications.
Note
If the logical device set up in "803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments" on
page 4-31 is set to CTI, this field must be set to Asynchronous data flow.
Possible values: Synchronization or Asynchronization (default = Asynchronization)
04 Server Port Number
Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This field is
required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not, leave this field
blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
Note
Use 6000 for Network BLF, 3000 for Network DSS and 5000 for Network TPI.
05~08 Client IP
Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Address
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
Note
Enter IP address of Stratagy iES32 or SES.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-33

System
I/O Device
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this screen to setup the RS-232
serial ports on the BSIS PCB.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays.
2. Click the RS232 Serial Port tab. 804
BSIS RS232 Serial Port Set Up
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 804 data.
4. Click Submit.
6539
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 BSIS Port (1~4)
Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
01 Port Speed
Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
Note
The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot exceed 57,600 bps.
02 Port Parity
Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values: None, Even or Odd (default)
03 Data Bits
Select Data Length.
Possible values: 7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits
04 Flow Control
This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the SMDI
or SMDR device. To enable Strata CTX to buffer call records, set this field to Flow.
Possible values: None (default) or Flow
05 Wait Timer
Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one through
255 seconds. Select 0 to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 30)
4-34
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
115 Advisory Messages
115 Advisory Messages
Prerequisite Program: None
This command specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status
information when others call your station. These messages can be customized to include a directory
number, time or date as part of the message.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Advisory Messages. The
Advisory Message Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
2. Select the Message Number.
3. Enter the desired message in 01
Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits Type.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Message Number
Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. See Table 4-6
below for details.
Possible values: 0~4 = pre programmed messages, 5~9 = custom messages
(default = 0)
Syst
01 Message
Enter the Advisory Message to be displayed on the receiving parties LCD.
em
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 User Entered Variable
Select the type of Additional Digits that can be appended to complete the
Advisory Message. The total message cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values: None (default), DN, Time or Date
Table 4-6
Advisory Message Default Code Table
#
Advisory Message
Type of Additional
0
OUT TO LUNCH
None
1
IN A MEETING
None
2
CALL
Directory Number
3
BACK AT
Time
4
RETURN ON
Date
5
(No Data)
None
6
(No Data)
None
7
(No Data)
None
8
(No Data)
None
9
(No Data)
None
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-35

System
116 Data Initialize
116 Data Initialize
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CTX system.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Data Initialize. The Data
Initialize screen displays (shown
right).
2. Select a Program to initialize from
the 01 Command No. dialog box.
3. Click Submit.
Table 4-7
Data Initialize Programs
Program
Program Name
Page #
Numbers
500
500 System Call Forward Assignment
4-18
520
521
522
523
524
LCR Guide Page
9-17
525
526
527
529
530
531
533
534
Destination Restriction Guide Page
9-10
651
531
533
534
651
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
9-56
653
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
9-57
654
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
9-57
655
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
9-57
4-36
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

System
120 Tenant Data Assignment
120 Tenant Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to select an
Attendant or Night Bell to ring when
dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day 3 mode for
up to eight different Tenants. You can also
assign the general purpose relay to the
Night Bell in this program. (This feature is
available with Strata CTX R2.2 or higher
and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G0 or higher.)
1. From the Program Menu, click System
> Tenant Data.
2. Enter the Tenant Number or use the
pull-down to select a number.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
6957
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
Possible values: 1~8. No Data (Default)
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Type
Select to call an Attendant or select to ring the Night Bell when dialing the
Tenant Attendant Access Code in the Day1, Day 2, or Day 3 mode for this
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Type
Tenant.
03 Dial 0 Call Night Dst Type
Important!
The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prg
Syst
102. If it should be "0," the Attendant Console Group Access
Code, which is "0," must be deleted.
em
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, Night Bell
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Digits
Enter the PDN of the Attendant (BATI) to ring when dialing Tenant Attendant
Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Digits
Possible values: Up to 32 digits for each Day Mode selected (default =
03 Dial 0 Call Night 3 Dst Digits
noData)
04 Night Mode Relay
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously when the system is
in the night mode.
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5
05 Night Bell Relay
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or DID rings
when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must be assigned to
ring the night bell.
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
4-37

System
120 Tenant Data Assignment
4-38
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
5
This chapter provides Strata CTX station programming information for programmers using the CTX
WinAdmin programming interface.
Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216 and 502
The following programs assign station data.
Basic/200 Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns stations to the system.
1. Use the "Basic Station Record Sheets" on page D-11 to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Basic tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed DNs.
·
Extended List view a
detailed list of programmed
St
DNs.
ation
·
Create Assign a new DN
with custom settings by
entering a DN value. Press
OK, assign the PDN
Equipment No. and click
Submit.
·
Selective Copy Enter a DN
in the Primary DN field and
click Selective Copy to make a new DN assignment with settings copied from the DN entered in the
Primary DN field.
·
Delete Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-1

Station
Assignment
·
Change DN Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN
assignment and click OK.
5. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PDN Equipment No.
Enter the PDN equipment number (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit
number of the ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU interface PCB to which the
the PDN is, or should be assigned.
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3;
enter 050203.
CTX28 Equipment Numbers: DKT 1~8 = 0101(01~08); SLT 1 & 2 = 0104 (01~02);
DKT 9~16 = 0107 (01~08).
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Station Type
Select Station Type.
Possible values: DKT (default) or SLT
03 Circuit Type
Select Extension or Assign Voice Mail attributes to analog circuits
Possible values: Extension (default) or Voice Mail
·
Extension Should be assigned to PDNs that are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones.
·
Voice Mail Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail circuits.
·
Announce Not used in the U.S.A. or Canada. (This feature is available with
CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
04 COS Day1
Assign COS to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
·
Night
05 DRL Day1
DRL for DAY1, Day 2 and Night
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Night
06 FRL Day1
Assign FRL to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes. The higher the FRL number, the
more trunk access is available.
·
Day2
·
Night
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
07 LCR Group
Station LCR Group Number
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
5-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
08 QPL Day1
QPL for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Night
09 Station Name
Enter Station Name to be displayed on this PDNs LCD.
Possible values: Max. 8 characters for CTXR1.0~2.20. Max. 16 chars. for R2.21
and higher. (default = no value)
10 Call Waiting Tone
Select desired waiting tone for Offhook Campon.
Possible values: None (default), Singular or Continuity
11 Dialing Progress
Select type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code
Tone
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
12 System Call
Select the System Call Forward Group number.
Forward.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic), 0~32 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = 0)
13 Call Pickup
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
Possible values: Permitted (default), Group Only or Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations.
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Notes
·
Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set
for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
·
The IP-QSIG network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech), all standard
telephone equipment must be set to 'Speech' if making calls over IP-QSIGs.
Possible values: 3.1kHzAudio (default) or Speech
15 Display DN
Enter the number to be displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. This number is will be overridden by Program 209, 04 (if assigned) and if
the PDN is in a hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
16 Caller Emergency
Enter the E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Service Identification
Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no value), however CESID should be
(CESID)
10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
St
at
(CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows upto 16 digits.
ion
17 Emergency Call
Enter the Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Group
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
18 Remote CF/DND
Enter password to set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CTX
Password
station; or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-3

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
19 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number
is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16)
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN; and on calls to the PDN
that forward to voice mail. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
22 MW to VM Port
Enter the Message Waiting center DN. For Remote CTXs, assign message center
including Node IP for TPI integration. This parameter enables Call Record function
too.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
23 Travelling COS
Enable this station with the privilege to change the Travelling COS Override Code.
Change
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 TGAC Override1
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override (for Attendant console) from
this station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Service Tones
Disable Service Tone for Data Privacy.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Note
Service tone such as Call Waiting should be disabled for modems, faxes,
and similar devices.
26 CW and ROB Tone
Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Campon) and Ring Over Busy
Tone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Notes
·
CW tone is always two beeps.
·
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
27 Name Display
Enable this station with the privilege to put the user name in the Directory
Assistance display of a large LCD.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
28 Door Ovr DND
Enable DND override by door phone.
Possible values: Override or Do not Override (default)
30 Chg Sys Speed
Enable this parameter to program System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
31 Network COS
Select Network COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
32 Auto OCA
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA
calls to be received.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
33 Originate OCA
Enable this station with the privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
5-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
34 RSTU Supervision
This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in Program 104, FB06 for these
types of Connections.
Possible values: Received (default) or Not Received
Possible values: Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically
hang up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with "Not Received."
35 Station SpDial Bins
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station:
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
36 Set SLT Dial Type
Choose DP (Old style - dial pulse dialling) or DTMF (Newer type - tone dialling).
37 Set Call Forward
When the handset is picked up, the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is
Dial Tone
enabled.
38 Dialling Digit
After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialling any
Restriction
subsequent digits.
39 CO Park & Hold
You can enable or disable CO Park and Hold.
Note
This feature is available for CTX Software version R1.03 or higher.
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
40 MW & DND Dial
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone
Tone
when it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone
burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
41 Activate Message
This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with
Waiting
CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on
other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8 or 9; or, by pressing the
Msg key. This feature is available with Strata CTX R1.3 software.
St
at
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on other
ion
stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.
Notes
·
When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate station-to-station
message waiting by pressing the Msg button.
·
This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the special Message
Waiting access codes.
42 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned. (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: 1~8.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-5

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
43 Hook-Switch Recall
Whether to start Recall when a station does On Hook in C-Hold.
Possible values: Enable: Activate Recall
Disable: Not activate Recall
44 Auto-Campon to
This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN, even when it is busy and called
PDN
by a CO line. If Automatic Camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN can camp
on even if the CO line group has auto-camp on disabled in Program 304-17.
Possible values: Enable: Allows auto camp-on to a PDN, even when it is busy and
called by a CO line.
Disable: Does not allow auto camp-on to a PDN.
45 LCR PDN Code
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The
PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values: 3 or 4 digits.
5-6
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
Station PDN Selective Copy
This screen provides you the option of selecting either all or some of the parameters to be copied to the
destination PDNs.
Using this screen you can do any of the following functions:
·
Copy to multiple destination PDNs.
·
Check All to highlight all the parameters
to be copied.
...or select individual/multiple
parameter(s) to be copied.
1. Select Station > Assignments. Enter the
Primary DN.
2. Click Submit > Copy. The Selective
Copy screen displays (shown right).
3. Check Highlight All to highlight all the
parameters to be copied.
...or select individual/multiple
parameter(s) to be copied.
Note If you want to copy almost all items
and leave out a few, you can check
6197
Highlight All and then click on the
items that you don't want to copy to deselect them.
4. Click Copy Now to start the copying process.
5. When copy is complete, a dialog box displays that reads "End of Copy!"
Note You can return to the previous page and/or reselect copy to different destination PDNs by clicking
Back.
Station Extended List
The Extended List displays the following parameters that are set in Program 200--Station Equipment
Number, DKT/SLT, Extension/Voice Mail, Primary DN, User Name, PDN VMID, COS, DRL, FRL, LCR
Group, System Call Forward Template, Network COS and the quantity of Station Speed Dial bins.
¥ To access the extended list
¥ Select Station > Assignments > Extended List. The Extended List spreadsheet displays after it
downloads from the CTX (sample shown below). This takes some time depending on the CTX
connection speed and database size.
St
ation
6192
The screen may be kept up and moved around to use as a reference and can be printed. The Extended
List spreadsheet can be sorted by all 19 columns and sorting can be toggled between Ascending and
Descending order. The entire table can be printed using the Print button on the screen.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-7

Station
Assignment
204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephones station parameters.
1. Use the "DKT Parameters Record Sheet" on page D-12 to record your desired DKT settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the DKT tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a DN number in the Primary
DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed DKTs.
·
PDN Table View view a
detailed list of programmed
PDNs.
·
Selective Copy Enable you to
copy some or all of the
parameters to the destination
5714
PDNs.
5. Setup the DKT by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Station Type
Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant, the system can support four
circuits.
Possible values: Extension (default) or Attendant
02 Key Strip Pattern
This option allows you select a pre-defined keystrip pattern and submit it to the
digital telephone. It does not display what pre-defined keystrip (if any) has been
assigned to the telephone.
Use the Key tab screen to view or edit telephone keystrip assignments.
CAUTION!
Submitting a keystrip pattern will overwrite existing keys
programmed on a telephone.
Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected Pattern is applied to
the 'Key Strip Type' parameter.
None applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-Touch buttons and
DND.
Pattern 3 applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons. (DKT3014 uses
only Pattern 1 or None).
Possible values: Pattern 1, 2 or None (default)
5-8
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 Key Strip Type
Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note
Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from
1~24, valid values are 10, 14 and 20.
Possible values: 1, 3, 7, 10, 14 or 20 (default)
Applies 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones:
1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001 and DKT3001|
7 button keystrips apply to DKT3007 and SoftIPT
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010 and DKT30010
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020 and DKT3020.
04 Add on Modules
Select the number of Add On Modules (ADM) assigned to this station. This field is
required if you want to program ADM FBs in Program 213. See "Key" on page 5-16.
Possible values: None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units
05 Tone First /Voice
Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
First
For each iES32 PDN, set to "Tone First", if set to Voice First iES32 will not answer.
Possible values: Tone or Voice (default)
06 OCA Type
Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA Originate
below.
Possible values: Handset (default) or Speaker
09 Handsfree MIC
If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter
Setting
to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Handsfree Tone
If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter to
send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals. Disabling this
parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on / 3 sec Off).
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
St
ation
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-9

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
13 Off Hook
Select Off Hook Preference.
Preference
Possible values: Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime and
Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button or dials a
digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the telephone will select an idle PDN
or Line button, or answer an incoming call, according to the preferences set in this
command.
This command works in conjunction with the "14 PDN/Line preference" and "15 Call
Answer Preference" programs.
The possible values are described as follows:
·
Idle The telephone will select and idle DN or Line button depending on the "14
PDN or Line preference" choice. In either case priority is always the lowest
numbered button that is idle. The telephone will not answer ringing calls
automatically.
·
Ringing The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN, secondary DN,
PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or longest ringing button depending
on the "15 Call Answer Preference" choice. The telephone will not automatically
select a DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.
·
Primary DN The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN button, if
idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other buttons on the telephone.
·
No Preference The telephone will not select any button when the user goes off
hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection will also disable the telephone's
Hot Dial Pad feature.
·
Primary DN and Idle The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN
button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select an idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button
(14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).
·
Primary DN and Ringing The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select a
ringing Line button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or a ringing
DN button (14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).
·
Ringing and Idle The telephone will always answer any ringing call according
to "15 Call Answer Preference" . If a call is not ringing it will select and idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN
or Line preference - PDN Preference).
14 PDN/Line
Offhook preference button Type.
Preference
Possible values: CO Key or DN Key (default)
·
CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group CO line button)
have priority over DN buttons with "13 Off Hook Preference" choices. The
lowest numbered line button on the telephone has priority over other line
buttons for idle selection.
·
Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or PhDN button)
have priority over Line buttons with "13 Off Hook Preference" choices. The PDN
button has first priority for idle selection, the lowest numbered DN button on the
telephone has priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button
is busy.
Note
Off hook ringing selections are also based on "15 Call Answer Preference"
choices.
5-10
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Ringing Preference
Ringing call answer preference.
Possible values: Longest or Call Type (default)
·
Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of the longest
ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
·
Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is applied to the longest
ringing button.
Call Type Priorities are fixed is software as shown below:
·
Emergency Calls
·
Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller).
·
ACD calls
·
Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
·
External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
·
Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)
16 Text Message
Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the message.
Display
Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values: Immediate (default) or Not Immediate
17 Call History
Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
Memory
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
18 DTMF Back Tone
Enables audible DTMF when dialing from a DKT to a trunk or Voice Mail port.
Padded dialing mutes the volume level to the caller not the called trunk or VM
device.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
19 Continuous DTMF
Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF for DKT2000 and DTK3000 series telephones.
Enabled allows the telephone to send DTMF tones to the far end continuously as
long as the key on the dial pad is held down.
Notes
·
For each iES32 PDN, set to 'Not Continuous', if set to 'Continuous', outdial
notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function properly.
·
DKT1000 series telephones do not support continuous DTMF. DKT1000 series
telephones must be set to 'Not Continuous' or they will misdial.
Possible values: Continuous (default) or Not Continuous
St
at
20 Display Language
Select the LCD Display Language.
ion
Possible values: English (default), British English or French
21 Adapter
Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).
·
BPCI for USB interface.
·
BATI for PC Attendant Console Interface.
Possible values: None (default), BPCI or BATI
22 Blind Transfer
Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
Possible values: Leave or Separate (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-11

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
23 Mail Box Selection
Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording. If set to
"Auto" CTX uses the VM ID of the station initiating the record function.
Notes
·
The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call the VM port or
Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
·
When set to "Auto" the VM-ID of the station initiating the record function is sent
to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
·
When set to "Manual Input" the user may enter any valid Mailbox followed by
the "#" sign. If the user Presses "#" without additional data the CTX will send the
VMID of the originating station.
Possible values: Auto or Manual (default)
24 MIC Init. Value
Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone call.
Note
The microphone must be enabled.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
25 Microphone
Enable microphone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
26 Speaker Mode
Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy Tone
Tones
while on a speaker phone call.
Possible values: Yes (default) or No
27 Ring Over Busy
Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Cycles
Possible values: Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note
See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual telephones.
28 Attd Overflow Dest.
Select overflow destination for attendant.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)
29 Trunk Test and
Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.
Verify
Possible values: Yes or No (default)
30 Auto Line Hold
Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to "line hop" from one
call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
31 Call Progress
Allows the telephone to be set to ring or not ring when busy on a call. If a telephone
Dependency
has multiple DNs (PDN + PhDNs), set this parameter to the Line Mode.
Line Mode: Calls will ring the telephone when the user is talking on a line or DN
button if the telephone has multiple DN or line buttons in a hunt configuration. If Call
Forward Busy/No Answer is set, the telephone will Ring No Answer and then
forward when a call is delivered to the telephone while the user is talking on a DN or
CO line button.
Terminal Mode: Callers will receive busy tone when any DN or CO line button on
the telephone is in-use. If Call Forward Busy/No Answer is set on the telephone a
call to the telephone will forward immediately when a call is delivered while the user
is talking on any DN or CO line button.
Possible values: Line Mode (default) or Terminal Mode
5-12
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
32 Programming Mode
Enable: Allows the telephone to enter the Programming Mode. Disable: Restricts
the telephone from entering the Programming Mode. This parameter is available
only with Strata CTX Release 2.0 MF017 and higher.
CAUTION!
Since we added this parameter, you cannot downgrade to
previous versions of CTX because we do not support
downward compatibility of CTX database. If you attempt
downgrading, the entire Program 204 will be lost. Toshiba
recommends keeping the current database for emergency
situations. We guarantee upward compatibility of the database,
so you can upgrade the system without any problems.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Feature Button Patterns
The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for )% above.
Table 5-1
20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Primary DN
Primary DN
Primary DN
FB02
CO 1
CO 1
No Data
FB03
CO 2
CO 2
No Data
FB04
CO 3
CO 3
No Data
FB05
CO 4
CO 4
No Data
FB06
CO 5
CO 5
No Data
FB07
CO 6
CO 6
No Data
FB08
CO 7
CO 7
No Data
FB09
CO 8
CO 8
No Data
FB10
CO 9
CO 9
No Data
FB11
CO 10
CO 10
No Data
FB12
CO 11
CO 11
No Data
FB13
CO 12
CO 12
No Data
FB14
CO 13
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB15
CO 14
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB16
CO 15
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB17
CO 16
Single Touch Button
No Data
St
FB18
CO 17
Single Touch Button
No Data
atio
FB19
CO 18
Single Touch Button
No Data
n
FB20
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
No Data
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-13

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Primary DN
Primary DN
Primary DN
FB02
CO 1
CO 1
No Data
FB03
CO 2
CO 2
No Data
FB04
CO 3
CO 3
No Data
FB05
CO 4
CO 4
No Data
FB06
CO 5
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB07
CO 6
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB08
CO 7
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB09
CO 8
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB10
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
No Data
Table 5-3
14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Primary DN
Primary DN
Primary DN
FB02
CO 1
No Data
No Data
FB03
CO 2
No Data
No Data
FB04
CO 3
No Data
No Data
FB05
CO 4
No Data
No Data
FB06
CO 5
No Data
No Data
FB07
No Data
No Data
No Data
FB08
CO 7
No Data
No Data
FB09
CO 8
No Data
No Data
FB10
CO 9
No Data
No Data
FB11
CO 10
No Data
No Data
FB12
CO 11
No Data
No Data
FB13
Do Not Disturb
No Data
No Data
FB14
No Data
No Data
No Data
5-14
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
214 DSS Console Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a station. The
assignment is referenced to the stations's Primary DN.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
2. Click on the DSS tab (shown
right).
3. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed DSSs.
·
Extended List view a
detailed list of programmed DSSs.
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter the PDN of the station that is to be associated with the DSS console(s).
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).
01~08 DSS Equipment
Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.
No. 1~8
CTX28 Equipment Numbers: DKT 1~8 = 0101(01~08); SLT 1 & 2 = 0104
(01~02); DKT 9~16 = 0107 (01~08).
Cabinet Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100). Select 01 for
Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet (CTX670).
Slot Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots (CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots (CTX670).
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must be deleted, using
St
PRG201, before attempting to assign the DSS console.
ation
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-15

Station
Assignment
Key
Program Number(s): 205, 213, and 215
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1 and 204 page 5-8
The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to
represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional parameters to
completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone
pitch when ringing occurs).
1. Use the "Feature Button Record Sheet" on page D-13 to plan your FB assignments.
2. From the Program Menu, click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Key tab (shown below).
Notes
·
To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
·
To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2 shown below), FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204
must be set to One or Two.
4. Enter one of the following in the Primary DN field:
·
Primary DN to program DKT FBs.
·
Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
·
Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs
...or click one of the following buttons:
·
List view a summary list of programmed DKTs.
·
Extended List view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
5-16
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
·
Copy After entering the source DN in the Primary DN field, click Copy and designate which FB
buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and click OK.
(Range is permitted.)
·
Cross Copy This button enables you to copy specific keys from a station's keypad to desired keys
of other station key pads. This function is available only with CTX WinAdmin R2.1 and above.
Refer to "Cross Copy" on page 5-19 for steps to use this function.
Distinctive Ringing Release 1.3 and higher software enables you to set different incoming ringing tones
for internal and external calls on a Prime DN. Ten different tones are available. This can be set from
Programs 205, 213 and 215.
¥ To set Distinctive Ringing, double click the button
that you want to set distinctive ringing. A dialog
box displays (shown right).
Click the drop-down arrows to set the External and
Internal tone pitches. The possible values are
shown in Table 5-4.
Notes
O
You must have the following versions of
processor boards for Distinctive Ringing:
CTX670: BECU1A, V.1C or later.
CTX100: ACTU1A, V.2D or later.
O
For any older versions of processor boards,
you can assign only "01" to Tone Pitch for
internal calls and you can assign only "11,"
"13," "15," or "17" to Tone Pitch for external
calls.
O
Ringing tone pitch has no effect on telephone
volume.
O
When programming External Ringing Repeat with a Distinctive Ringing Pitch, we recommend
that you use pitches "11" or "12" and not "17" or "18".
O
Incoming recall tone cannot be changed.
O
Calls to Tie lines adopt the internal call pitch.
Table 5-4
Internal and External Call Ringing Tones
Tone No.
Frequency and Cadence
St
at
01
500 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
ion
02
1300 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
11
500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
12
500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
13
860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
14
860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
15
1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
16
1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
17
860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 3 sec. Off, repeat
18
860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. Off, repeat
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-17

Station
Assignment
5. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
6. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
·
Directory No Assign a Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message Waiting,
or DSS key to this FB. See "Directory Number Sub-parameters" on page 5-20 for more details.
·
CO Line Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See "CO Lines Sub-parameters" on
page 5-21 for more details.
·
Features Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release, BGM Key,
Program Access, Account Code, Application Starting or Split Key feature to this FB.
·
Call Control Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
·
Call Forward Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward Busy,
Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward
Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
·
Park Page Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging, Individual
Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
·
Call Pickup Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed Group,
Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, Pickup-
Remote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.
·
Door Lock Enable FB to unlock Door Lock. See "Door Lock Sub-parameters" on page 5-21 for
more details.
·
Voice Mail Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.
·
Attendant Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test, Attendant
Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
·
One Touch Assign FB as a One Touch button. See "Setting the One Touch Button" on page 5-19.
This feature is available only with CTX software release 1.03 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
software 1.17 and higher.
·
Split Assign FB to Split the connected party and the conference master from the conference (for
private call). (Join button is used to reconnect both parties to the conference.) This feature will be
available only with CTX software release 2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin software 2.2 and
higher. The Split button should not be assigned to a DKT2304-CT cordless telephone.
·
Blank Clear FB assignment.
7. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB displays
an abbreviation for the selected feature.
...or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock parameters, additional fields are required. See
the tables that follow for more details. Follow the directions in each pop-up dialog box.
8. To modify an existing feature button, double-click the feature button and make the change in the
appropriate dialog box that displays.
9. Click Submit.
5-18
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
Cross Copy
This function is available only with CTX WinAdmin Release 2.1 software and above. Use the following
steps to cross copy keys from one station to the keys of another stations key pad:
1. From the Key Page, enter
the Prime DN.
2. Click Submit.
3. Click the Cross Copy
button. The Source and
Target Copy screen displays
(shown right). Enter the
"Copy To" PDNs
...or click Select to select the
target PDN.
4. From the Source DKT,
select key to be copied.
5. Click the Copy Now button.
The Detail report screen
displays.
6. Click Done. The Target
DKT with the copied key
displays.
7. Verify the key copied.
Setting the One Touch Button
Follow the step above 1~8 above to assign an FB as a One Touch button. Then complete the following
steps:
1. Double click the key assigned as One Touch.
2. The following dialog box displays
This dialog box is used to define each button with the One
Touch Data.
3. Enter the One Touch data, then click OK.
Example 1: Setting up a One Touch button to transfer to
Voice Mail.
St
at
Select the Cnf/Trn from the white box on the right, CNF
ion
displays in the One Touch Data field. Then type #407 after
CNF displays in the One Touch Data box. It adds Cnf/Trn
#407 in the One Touch Data. Click OK. Then click Submit.
Example 2: To originate a call from the PDN, select the FK
as 01 if the PDN is on the first key, then add the telephone
number next to FK01 in the One Touch Data box.
Cancel clears the changes and takes you back to the previous
page.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-19

Station
Assignment
Directory Number Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
1. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
2. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Secondary/Phantom DN
1. Enter DN Number.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Phantom DN Message
Enter Phantom DN No.
Warning
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
DSS Key
Enter DSS Primary DN No.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
5-20
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
CO Lines Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
CO
1. Select CO Line #.
Possible values: 1~264 (CTX670), 1~64 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
3. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
4. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
GCO
1. Select GCO No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Index.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
3. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
4. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
5. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Pooled Line Key
1. Select Pool Line No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Door Lock Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Door Unlock
Select Door Lock No.
St
at
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 1)
ion
Station Flexible Button Assignments
Use the "Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones" on page D-14 and "Record Sheets for the
DKT3014" on page D-15 to plan your Station Flexible Button Assignments.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-21

Station
Assignment
Timer
Program Number(s): 208
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the "Station Data
Record Sheets" on
page D-18.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Timer tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record
by clicking one of the
following buttons:
·
List view a summary
list of programmed
DKTs.
·
Extended List view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
·
Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Enter the Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 ABR Retry Count
Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy telephone
number.
Possible values: 5~20 (default = 15)
02 ABR Retry Interval
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.
Timer
Possible values: 30~180 (default = 60)
03 ABR Recall Timer
Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring back
tone from the dialed number.
Possible values: 5~60 (default = 20)
04 Hold Recall Timer
Select the number of seconds before a call is placed on hold recalls.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 60)
05 First Interdigit
Select the amount of time a Station has to dial after going off hook before a call is
Timer
terminated (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
5-22
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 Second Interdigit
Select the amount of time the system waits between dialed digits before terminating a
Timer
call (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
07 Ring Xfer No
Select the Ring Transfer Idle station or Busy station (Camp-on) Recall Time (in seconds)
Answer Timer
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 32)
Emergency Ringdown Assignment
Program Number(s): 216
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the "Station Data
Record Sheets" on
page D-18.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the RingDown tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record
by clicking one of the
following buttons:
·
List view a summary
list of programmed
DKTs.
·
Extended List view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
·
Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit
St
at
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ion
01 Emergency Ringdown
Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 Emergency Ringdown
Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency
Timer
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 0)
03 Destination
Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-23

Station
206 Phantom DN
206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.
1. Complete the "Phantom DN
Record Sheet" on page D-16.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Phantom DN. The
Station Phantom DN screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter a Phantom DN number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed Phantom DNs.
·
Copy Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom DN to
copy the data too. Click OK.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Phantom DN
Enter Phantom DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Owned PDN
Set PhantomDN's Owner Station
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Tone/Voice First
Select from Tone first, or Voice first signaling.
Possible values: Tone First (default) or Voice First
04 Display DN
Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the
Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN, the number
displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
...or this number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
...or the calling telephone's PDN.
05 System Call Forward
Select the System Call Forward value.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic),0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
5-24
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
206 Phantom DN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 VM ID Code
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (This number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, )%~)%).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls to the PhDN that forward to voice
mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note
Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a PDN in
a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, )%).
The associated PDN's VMID code (Program 200, )%) will be sent to voice mail.
09 Message Center
Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM hunt
group.
Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 User Name
Enter user name.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 Display Name
Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
St
ation
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-25

Station
209 Hunt Group
209 Hunt Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
1. Complete the "Hunt Group Record
Sheet" on page D-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Hunt Group. The Station
Hunt Group screen displays.
3. Click on the Group tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a Group Number for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
·
Create Assign a new Hunt Group with custom settings.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Hunt Group Number
Possible values: 1~90 (CTX100), 1~200 (CTX670 Basic),1~640 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = no value)
01 Hunt Method
Select Hunt Method
Possible values: Distributed (for Voice Mail hunt groups) or Circular (for Multiple DN
hunt groups) (default)
02 Pilot Number
Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt group
can have a pilot number.
Note
Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups must
have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt groups should be Distributed with a Pilot
Number. Multiple DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no Pilot Number.
04 Number to Display
Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of the
hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt groups.
This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN Hunt group, in which case the
number would override the number assigned in Program 200, FB15 for PDNs
and Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.
05 Pilot No. SCFwd
Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a Hunt
Group.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic),0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
5-26
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
209 Hunt Group
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 Muitple DN Hunt
Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups
should be circular with no pilot number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
07 DHG Auto Camp-on
Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt Group or not.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers automatically camp on to
Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt groups.
218 Station Hunt Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 209 page 5-26
This program assigns station DNs to Hunt Groups using Program 209, and assigns the rotation order in
which DNs are hunted.
1. Complete the "Hunt Group Record
Sheet" on page D-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Hunt Group. The Station
Hunt Group screen displays.
3. Click on the Member tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a Group Number for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
·
Add Assign a new station DN to the Hunt Group number entered above.
·
Append Assign a new DN as the last DN in a Hunt Group's hunt order.
·
Modify Highlight an existing DN in the Hunt Order and change the station DN assignment.
·
Delete Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number.
5. Click Submit.
St
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
atio
Hunt Group Number
Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or Delete
n
buttons as described above.
Possible values: 1~640 (default = no value)
01 Hunt Order
This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group's Hunt Order. The Hunt
Order is selected automatically by CTX WinAdmin. Programmers should assign the last
station in the Hunt Order first and assign the first station in the Hunt Order last.
Possible values: 1~560 (default = no value)
02 DN
By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the Hunt Group's Hunt Order.
Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry, use the Modify button as described above.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-27

Station
Hunt Group Table View
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 DN Set Type
Modify (replace) an existing assignment.
Possible values: Modify (default) or Insert
Hunt Group Table View
Hunt Group Table View
enables you to view all hunt
groups and its members.
¥ To access the Hunt Group
Table View
¥ Select Station > Hunt
Group Table View.
See "Table Views" on
page 2-8 for table
functionality.
Note This table has more
functions in addition to
the regular
functionality found in
other table views.
The Navigation Bar has the following additional buttons:
·
Delete Click on a row to delete any directory number from a Hunt Group, then click the Delete
button. When the Delete button is active, the Add button and the Delete Group button will not be active.
To unselect a row that is selected (in yellow), click the row again.
·
Add To add directory numbers to a hunt group select the
Hunt group in the table view from the Navigation drop down
in the Navigation bar, then click the Add button.
If no rows are selected, the Add button is active. Click the
Add button to add members to Hunt groups. When you click
the Add button, the Add dialog box displays (shown right).
Select the DN from the Available Directory Numbers box,
then click the Arrow button in the center. This moves the
DN to Hunt Group box on the left. Click Add now to Save
the entry or Cancel to cancel. Clicking Add Now
automatically refreshes the table view.
In the dialog box shown right, if you want 6200 to appear
before 5200, click 6200 on the right, then click 5200 on the
left and then click the arrow in the center.
·
Select All and Unselect All Clicking these buttons, selects
or unselects all groups in a table.
5-28
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Paging Group
Paging Group
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).
1. From the Program Menu click
Station > Page Group.
2. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record by
clicking one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed DKTs.
·
Extended List view a
detailed list of programmed
DKTs.
·
Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Primary DN
Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups. A station may
belong to more than one paging group.
Note
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up
to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670. Any software release
before R1.01, M19 supports only 32 stations in a paging group for all CTX
system types.
Page Group capacity: CTX100 4 Page Groups; CTX670 Basic 6 Page Groups;
CTX670 Expanded 16 Page Groups
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
PG01~PG16
Check to assign the DN to this paging group. The number of Page Groups that can be
assigned are: 1~4 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670 Basic); 1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
St
at
Possible values: On or Off (default)
ion
Note
Up to 120 stations may be assigned to a paging group in the Strata CTX 670
All Page Group
Check to assign the DN to the All Page Group.
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
All Emergency Page
Check to assign the DN to the All Emergency Page Group.
Group
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-29

Station
Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View
enables you to view all paging
groups and its members.
¥ To access the Paging Group
Table View
¥ Select Station > Paging Group
Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-8
for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add,
Select All and Unselect All, refer
to "Hunt Group Table View" on
page 5-28
Note The Add button works a
little different on this table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.
5-30
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
210 Pickup Group
210 Pickup Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
The Call Pickup Group assignment specifies which group numbers this station will participate when either
the Group Call Pickup or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be assigned to
more than one group.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01~32
Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this stations is to
participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
Note
01~05 are available for CTX100, 01~10 are available for CTX670 Basic,
and 01~32 are available for CTX670 Exp.
Pickup Group Table View
Pickup Group Table View
enables you to view all Pickup
groups and its members.
¥ To access the Paging Group
Table View
¥ Select Station > Pickup
Group Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-8
for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add,
Select All and Unselect All, refer
to "Hunt Group Table View" on
page 5-28.
Note The Add button works a
little different on this
table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
St
the Add Now button.
ation
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-31

Station
Multiple Call Group
Multiple Call Group
To set up Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing you must have a Multiple Call (MC) Group set in Program 517.
You can register up to 25 calling members for every MC Group in Program 518. You can set each member
to be Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2. The Delayed Ring times are independently
adjustable (1~180 seconds) for each Multiple Call Group Member.
Important!
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs. See "Member Requirements" below.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Incoming Call to Multiple Call (MC) Group
The following can occur when calling members are set as Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2.
·
If the members of a MC Group are assigned Immediate ring, the call is received at all destinations
immediately. In this case, each destination LCD displays the same incoming call information.
·
If the MC Group destination (member) is assigned to Delayed Ring 1 or Delayed Ring 2, each
destination will start to ring when the delay time runs out. During the delay time the member PDN or
PhDN button will flash red but not ring.
Important!
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
·
If some MC Group destinations are busy, incoming call rings only idle destinations. However, if the
camp-on feature is in effect, incoming calls will camp-on to busy destinations.
·
Members can be assigned to multiple MC Groups.
MCPN Owner Privileges
When you assign members to an MC group, the member assigned to Index 1 in Program 518 is considered
the owner of the group. The owner of the group is the only member entitled to the following privileges:
·
The owner is the only member in the group that can receive Automatic Call Back calls and Message
Waiting Indications.
·
The ringing option for the owner is always set to Immediate ring.
·
The owner can be a PhDN or PDN.
Member Requirements
The table below has details for members that can and cannot be in a group.
Members that can be in a Group
Members that cannot be in a Group
PDNs
Pilot DNs - ACD, MCP
PhDNs
CO Line Access Codes
Station Hunt Group Pilot DNs
Att.Consoles and BATI or DKTs assigned to the Attendant in programming.
Important!
·
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and PhDNs.
·
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt Group Pilot
Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
·
Attendant Consoles cannot be members of multiple call groups and cannot overflow to MC groups.
Assigning Attendant Consoles to MC groups will cause Attendant Consoles to misfunction. Do not set
Attendant Consoles to overflow to MC groups.
5-32
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Multiple Call Group
Call Forward Activation
System and Station Call Forward can be set up for each Multiple Calling (MC) Group. The Call Forward
Remote Access Code is used to activate or de-activate Station Call Forward of MC Group. System Call
Forward is activated/deactivated using CTX WinAdmin. The MC Group can also be set as the destination
of System on Station Call Forward.
517 Multiple Calling Group Assignment
Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing which enables you to delay ring to voice mail and auto attendants.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click Create. A dialog box displays.
3. Enter a calling group index in the
dialog box.
The calling group index can be 1~16
(CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic),
and 1~64 (CTX670 Expanded).
4. Click Ok. Parameter 01 MC Group
Pilot Number gets highlighted.
5. Enter the DN of the MC group. This
number should not conflict with an
existing telephone number.
6. Verify and change other parameters.
7. Click Submit. The group index displays on the left of the program name.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Group Number
Select a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic) and 1~64 (CTX670
Exp.)
01 MC Group Pilot Number
Enter the Pilot Directory Number that should be assigned to the Multiple Call
Group. This can be any number 1~5 digits that does not conflict with numbers
in the current system Number Plan.
Possible values: 1~5 digits
02 Ring Delay 1 Timer
Set the timer in seconds.
St
Possible values: 1~180
ation
03 Ring Delay 2 Timer
Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180
04 System Call Forward
Assign a System Call Forward template number to the multiple calling group.
Enter 0 or 1~32.
Possible values: 0~32
05 Voice Mail ID
Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the Multiple Calling Group.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-33

Station
Multiple Call Group
518 Multiple Calling Members Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 517
Use this program to assign members to a group.
1. From the Program Menu, click Station
> Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click the Member tab.
3. Select the Index Number, then enter
the Member DN.
Important!
Immediate Destinations
can only be PDNs (Digital
and/or Standard
Telephones) and PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can be
PDNs of Standard
telephone circuits only and
Voice Mail Hunt Group
Pilot Numbers (not
Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Note Each group can have up to 25 members. You can have up to 64 groups.
4. Submit is greyed out because the members are automatically submitted as they get added.
Note The buttons on this screen are dynamic. When you select an empty Index number, the Add button
displays. When you select and existing Index number, the Modify and Remove buttons display.
Modify enables you to edit, while Remove deletes the multiple ringing group index number.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Multiple Calling Group Index
Enter a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic) and
1~64 (CTX670 Exp.)
01 Member DN
Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits
Important!
·
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard
Telephones) and PhDNs.
·
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and
Voice Mail Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Attendant Consoles cannot be members of multiple call groups and cannot
overflow to MC groups. Assigning Attendant Consoles to MC groups will
cause Attendant Consoles to misfunction. Do not set Attendant Consoles to
overflow to MC groups.
05 Ringing Options
Select either: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2.
5-34
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
516 Station Speed Dial
516 Station Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each station.
Speed Dial numbers are stored in "Bins" and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers by entering the
Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced Speed Dialing features are
available in Strata CTX.
·
Speed Dial Bin Linking Whenever a Speed Dial number exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin memory
limitation, the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the adjacent Speed
Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary Speed Dial Bin number.
Note Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the "adjacent Speed Dial Bin" as
described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum allowable dial
digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a unique Speed Dial record.
·
Speed Dial Number Nesting A Speed
Dial number can be nested into another
Speed Dial number. For example, if an
international dialing prefix is used often,
program the prefix in any Speed Dial
Bin. Then in the another Speed Dial Bin,
program the first Bin number + the
number to dial. When the second Speed
Dial Bin is activated, Strata CTX first
retrieves and dials the international
dialing prefix from the first Bin location,
then adds the numbers to dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click Station >
Speed Dial. The Station Speed Dial
screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.
01 Speed Dial Bin
Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100 speed dial bins.
St
Possible values: 00~99 (default = no value)
atio
Note
Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the number of speed dial
n
bins available to the station in increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of
speed dial bins available to the station can also be assigned and displayed in
Prg 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins. Example: If bin number 50 is entered here,
50 speed dial bins will automatically be assigned to the station and will also be
displayed in Prg 200, 35.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-35

Station
Station Speed Dial Table View
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Number
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the length of the
pause, 0=10 seconds.
Notes
·
If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will
automatically be appended to create longer numbers.
·
Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for dialing common
numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance access digits 1010321, these digits
can be nested in to other speed dial bins by using *100 as the first digits of the other
bins. Example putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would cause
SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number 10132117145563425.
·
If you are programming from the Telephone the digits * and # have a special
meaning when programming speed dial numbers. The # digit indicates the end of
entry and * is an escape character. To dial the digits * or # as part of the number;
enter ** or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents the number
of seconds for the pause function.
03 Name
Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 characters (default = no value)
Station Speed Dial Table View
Station Speed Dial Table View shows
the entire set up for all speed dial
numbers.
¥ To access the System Speed Dial
Table View
¥ Select System > System Speed
Dial Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-8 for
table functionality.
5-36
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
PDN Table View
PDN Table View
This screen shows the
entire list of available
PDNs (shown right).
¥ To access the Station
Speed PDN Table View
Select Station > PDN Table
View.
Note See "Table Views"
on page 2-8 for table
functionality.
ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
202 ISDN BRI Station
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI
stations.
1. Complete the "ISDN BRI Station
Record Sheets" on
page D-19.From the Program
Menu, click Station > ISDN >
Basic. The ISDN Basic Station
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Enter a Primary DN for an
existing record
St
at
...or click one of the following
ion
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed DN's.
·
Create Assign a new Primary
DN with custom BRI Station
settings.
·
Copy Enter a DN in the
Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI Station settings copied
from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
·
Delete Enter a ISDN Primary DN to delete and click OK.
·
Change DN Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN to the
ISDN BRI Station.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-37

Station
ISDN
3. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a new
station. The System assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 PDN Equipment No.
Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the cabinet, slot, and
circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS interface PCB to which the the PDN
is, or should be, assigned. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter
050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 ISDN Channel
Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.
Group
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic)1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)
03 ISDN Protocol
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set in
the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat'l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat'l ISDN Nortel
Note
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
04 Type Connection
Select connection type.
Possible values: Point to point (default) or Point to Multi-point
05 BRI Station COS
Select the BRI Station COS assignments.
·
Day1 COS
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
·
Day2 COS
·
Night COS
06 BRI Station DRL
Select the BRI Station DRL assignments.
·
Day1 DRL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Day2 DRL
·
Night DRL
07 BRI Station FRL
Select the BRI Station FRL assignments.
·
Day1 FRL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Day2 FRL
·
Night FRL
09 BRI Station QPL
Select the BRI Station QPL assignments.
·
Day1 QPL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Day2 QPL
·
Night QPL
5-38
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
08 LCR Group
Select the LCR Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 Speech Capability
Enable speech capability. See Table 5-5 on page 40.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 3.1 KHz Audio
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 40.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
12 7 KHz Audio
Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 40.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
13 64Kbps
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 5-5 on page 40.
Unrestricted
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
14 56Kbps
Unrestricted
15 2 x 64Kbps
Unrestricted
16 B Channel
Select originating B Channel method.
Selection
Possible values:
·
Exclusive (default) Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
·
Preferred Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
·
Any Channel Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
17 Idle B Channel
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Selection
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
·
Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).
·
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).
·
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low B-channel
selection).
·
Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
18 Interdigit Timer 1
Select the Interdigit timer value, to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
St
19 Interdigit Timer 2
Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
atio
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
n
20 CESID
Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
21 Number Voice Calls
Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously written
Allowed
data in this field is erased.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
Note
If One is selected, the other channel is reserved for Data.
22 Service Tone
Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.
Permission
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-39

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
23 TGAC Override
Enable TGAC Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 Change System
Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.
Speed
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Network COS
Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in this
field is erased.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
26 DN2~32 DN8
Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available
fields, default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data is applied to the DNs. If a
selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
33 Auto OCA
Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows calls
to be received.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
34 Originate OCA
Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
38 MW/DND
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone when
it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone burst before
dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
39 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned. (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: 1~8
40 Auto-Campon to
This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN, even when it is busy and called by a
PDN
CO line. If Automatic Camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN can camp on even if
the CO line group has auto-camp on disabled in Program 304-17.
Possible values: Enable: Allow auto camp-on to PDN
Disable: No auto camp-on to PDN
41 LCR PDN Code
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The PDN
code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values: 3 or 4 digits.
Table 5-5
BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bellcore
Bearer Services
ETSI
TTC
Nat'l ISDN
Speech
X
X
X
3.1kHz Audio
X
X
X
7kHz Audio
X
X
Circuit Mode
64 kbps
X
X
X
Rate adaptation
Unrestricted Digital Information
X
from 56 kbps
2x64
X
X
5-40
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
ISDN
217 ISDN Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 202 page 5-37
Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.
1. Complete the "ISDN Station Data
Record Sheet" on page D-20.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > ISDN > Station Data.
The ISDN Individual Station Data
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Primary DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
·
Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
4. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Enter Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Station Name
Enter a name for this station.
Possible values: Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Dial Method
Select the audible tone when dialing.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone
03 System Call Forward
Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)
04 CF Password
Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
St
at
Possible values: Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
ion
05 Door Phone Override
Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
DND
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Emerg Call Group
Select this station's emergency call group.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
07 COS Override Code
Enable Class of Service override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
08 Display DN
Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-41

Station
Setup Wizards
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 10 characters
(default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Program 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.
12 Name Display
Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Setup Wizards
There are three Station setup wizards--PDN Range, Multiple DN, and VMID Range. Each of them are
described below.
PDN Range Setup Wizard
This wizard is a programming time saver that reduces the time it takes to create or change Primary
Directory Numbers (PDN) and assign them to phones. The wizard guides the user to create a range of
desired PDNs to be assigned to a range of available station ports.
1. Select Station > Setup Wizard > PDN
Range.
Review the instructions that display
on the Wizard screen (shown right).
5-42
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Setup Wizards
2. Click Start. The Primary DN Setup
Wizard screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the appropriate radio buttons
and enter the data in the other fields.
·
Range of associated PDN
equipment.
·
Selection to overwrite the existing
PDNs.
4. (Optional) Click Number Plan button
to access Numbering Plan page.
5. (Optional) Click PDN Table View
button to view existing PDN Table.
6. Press Start to create PDNs.
The screen containing the PDN assignments
(shown right) displays.
Note The first available equipment number
(card slot/circuit) is automatically used to
create the first PDN, etc.
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard
Important!
·
To avoid conflicts on new installations, you should use this wizard immediately after establishing and
assigning Primary DNs on telephones, especially before you program key strips or hunt groups.
St
·
The wizard can be used to assign Multiple DNs to new stations when adding new station cards.
atio
This wizard substantially reduces CTX installation time when you need multiple DN buttons on
n
telephones. Multiple DNs are required in most CTX installations.
The wizard automatically programs multiple buttons onto telephones to operate as PDN buttons on the
telephones. This wizard automatically groups the telephone's PDN button with the Phantom Directory
Number (PhDN) buttons so they all operate like PDNs on the telephone--this simulates Strata DK
multiple PDN operation. You will not have to set Call forward or VMID codes for the PhDNs since they
automatically assume the PDN Call Forward and VMID code assignments.
On these screens you need to specify how many button appearances should appear as PDNs on each
telephone or range of telephones (the number of buttons including the PDNs plus the PhDNs). You should
also specify the starting PhDN and Hunt Group number to be used to set up the multiple DN groups.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-43

Station
Setup Wizards
Important!
Make sure you know exactly how many multiple DNs should be on each telephone before
using this wizard. After running the Multiple DN wizard, deletions or additions to Multiple
DN assignments must be made manually, one-by-one, for each telephone PhDN button and
Multiple DN hunt group. The wizard does not support changing existing Multiple DN
assignments in this version of CTX WinAdmin.
1. Click Station > SetUp
Wizard > Multiple DN.
The Multiple DN
Assignment Wizard
screen displays (shown
right).
2. Click Start. CTX
WinAdmin automatically
assigns the:
·
Appropriate number of PhDN buttons onto the telephone. These operate as PDN buttons on the
telephone. PhDNs are assigned in sequence starting with the first button above the PDN.
CAUTION!
If other buttons were installed in a PhDN location they will be overwritten.
·
Appropriate telephone as the owner of the PhDN buttons, starting with the PhDN you specified.
·
PDN of the telephone as the name of the PhDN buttons.
·
PDN and appropriate PhDNs of the telephone to the appropriate Multiple DN Hunt group, starting
with Hunt group number you specified.
The screen shown at right displays.
3. Based on your requirements, enter the
necessary fields.
Note The example on this screen shows that
five buttons were entered. This assigns
the PDN plus four PhDNs on the
telephone starting with Key 1~Key 5.
4. Click Start to generate the request.
5-44
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Station
Setup Wizards
The screen changes to the one shown at
right.
Important!
·
This is a report that provides the Multiple
DN assignments that will be sent to the
CTX.
·
Ensure that this information is correct
before you click Continue. You can change
the assignments by clicking Back.
5. Click Continue to generate results onto
CTX database.
Note To modify these entries later, you will
have to use the appropriate individual program assignments.
6. Review the configuration screen. This is how
the multiple DNs are assigned in the CTX after
the wizard is done.
7. (Optional) To print the configuration results,
click Print.
8. To exit, select a command from the Program
pane.
VMID Range
This wizard reduces CTX programming time when you need to assign Voice Mail ID (VMID) codes. The
wizard will automatically assign specified VMID codes for a range of Primary DNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot
DNs.
St
at
Specify the range of PDNs, PhDNs, or Pilot DNs that should have VMID code assignments. Then select
io
the VMID code assignment method.
n
The three code assignment methods are to assign the VMID to:
·
Be the same number as the appropriate DN (PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN).
·
Start at specific number and increment by one for each consecutive DN.
·
Be the same number for all DNs.
In addition to the above assignments, specific digits including * and # can be added to the front and/or back
of each VMID. This is not for Stratagy codes 91, 92, etc., they are set in Program 579.
You can program a range of VMID codes for PDNs, PhDNs and/or Pilot DNs.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
5-45

Station
Setup Wizards
1. Select Station > Setup Wizard > VMID Range.
2. The VMID Range Setup
Wizard displays (shown at
right).
3. Click Start. The input screen of the VMID Range
Setup Wizard displays (shown at right).
4. Select the type of VMID that should be assigned
to the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN. Then select the
assignment method and the digits, if any, to be
added to front and/or end of each VMID.
Note DN range is supported. VMID prefix and/or
suffix are supported.
5. Click Start to submit the settings to the CTX
database.

The result requested displays on the
screen shown at right.
6. (Optional) Click Print to save a hard copy
of the VMID assignment.
5-46
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
6
This chapter provides trunk programming information for Strata CTX.
304 Incoming Line Group
Program Number(s): 304
Incoming Line Groups (ILG) is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private
line groups for incoming service.
1. Complete the "ILG Record Sheet"
on page D-21.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ILG. The Trunk ILG
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed ILGs.
·
Create Assign a new ILG
with default settings.
·
Copy Enter an ILG in the
Group Number field and click
Copy to make a new ILG
assignment with settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
·
Delete Delete an ILG.
4. Enter Program 304 data.
5. Click Submit.
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-1

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Group Number
Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128
(CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Group Type
Select the ILG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Service Type
Select CO Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: DID or DIT (default)
04 Private Service Type
Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is set to
Tie.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG
05 GCO Key Number
Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same GCO
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128
(CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
06 Pooled Key Number
Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128
(CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
07 COS
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
08 DRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 FRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 DID Digits
Select number of DID digits received from CO.
Possible values: 0~7 (default = 0)
12 Speech/3.1 KHz
Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
6-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
13 Ringing Timer Delay 1
Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
14 Ringing Timer Delay 2
Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
15 Interdigit 1 Timer
Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 15)
16 Interdigit 2 Timer
Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 5)
17 Auto Camp-on
Select in box to toggle Automatic Camp-on.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
18 Calling Number ID
Select Calling Number Identification source.
Possible values: User Provided (default) or Network Provided
19 Intercept
Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept
position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT or
DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the call
cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a
simplified attendant console, the Attendant Console is usually specified to terminate
the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 Send Dial Tone
Enable Send Dial Tone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
21 TGAC Override
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
22 Network COS
Enter the Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
23 LCR Group
Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is not
entered.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
24 Change COS Override
Enable authority to change COS Override Code.
Code
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Register Speed Dial
Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
Codes
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Originator Invoke OCA
Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a
busy station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Trunks
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by-digit.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-3

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
28 Emergency Call Group
Used to enable E911 calling across a QSIG network. The QSIG ILG is assigned to
an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in Program 200 FB17.
Without this assignment, the call will not attempt to complete to one of the trunks in
the Emergency Group and will result in an abandoned call. See Program 550
Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Assignment.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
29 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values: 1~8.
30 Call-By-Call Cause
Enter the condition for which incomming ISDN calls disconnect when programmed
for Call-By-Call (min./max.).
User Busy: Cause 17
Circuit/Channel congestion: Cause 34
306 Outgoing Line Groups
Prerequisite Program: None
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for outgoing
service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).
1. Complete the "OLG Record Sheet"
on page D-22.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > OLG. The Trunk Outgoing
Line Groups (OLG) screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter an OLG number in the Group
Number field for an existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed OLGs.
·
Create Assign a new OLG
with default settings.
·
Copy Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG assignment
with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
·
Delete Delete an OLG.
4. Enter Program 306 data.
5. Enter Program 531. See "Destination Restriction Guide Page" on page 9-10 for details.
6. Enter Program 514. See "514 SMDR for OLG Assignment" on page 9-65 for details.
7. Click Submit.
6-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Enter the OLG Group number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670
Exp), (default = no value)
01 Group Type
Select the OLG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Private Service Type
TIE Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG
04 GCO Key1 Number
Select the first GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
06 Pooled Key1 Number
Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
07 Pooled Key2 Number
Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
08 COS
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
09 FRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 Speech/3.1 KHz
Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
12 MOH Source
Select MOH Source.
Possible values: Silence, External1~15 (default = External1)
13 Account Codes
Enable Trunk forced Account Codes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
14 Destination
Enable Destination Restriction.
Restriction
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
15 Credit Cart Calling
Enable Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Trunks
16 Send CESID
Enable CESID sending.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-5

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
17 QSIG Sending Type
Digit sending Mode for QSIG only.
Possible values: Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)
18 Network COS
Select Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
19 Recall on AC15
This enables or disables the sending and detection of a recall signal on AC15 TIE
lines. (This applies to the PACU PCBs only.)
300 Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system. Click on each tab to navigate through
the programs. The trunks assigned to the equipment display on the left of the screen. The first column
displays the trunks used and the second column displays the equipment. You can also sort based on trunks
and equipment.
Important!
You must have Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 on your PC for the sort to work correctly. If you
have IE 5.0, you can upgrade to IE 6.0 using the Strata CTX CD-ROM. IE 6.0 does not auto-
install from the CD-ROM; run ie6setup.exe from the IE 6.0 folder on the CD-ROM.
1. Complete the "Trunk Assignment
Record Sheet" on page D-23.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment. The Trunk
Basic Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
·
Create Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
·
Copy Enter an Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings
copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
·
Delete Delete an Trunk.
4. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see "308 Trunk Timer" on page 6-10 for
details).
6-6
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line Number
Enter the Line Number.
Possible values: CTX28: Line 01~03 = 0102 (01~03); Line 04~06 = 0108 (01~03)
1~64 (CTX100), 1~96 (CTX670 Basic),
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Line Equipment No.
Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08
...or zz = T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670).
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~8; zz = Circuit 01~08 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX100 Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX100 Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Incoming Line Group
Assign the trunk to Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
03 Outgoing Line Group
Assign the trunk to Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
04 Dial Mode
Enter the Dial Mode.
Possible values: DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)
·
DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
·
DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS
05 Signaling
Enter the signalling type.
Possible values: DID, Loop (default), Ground, Tie, LP (Japan), SR (Japan) or ACU
(UK)
06 Start Method
Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used between
the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.
Possible values: Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start
T
07 Release Supervision
Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
runks
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
08 Answer Supervision
Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-7

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 Trunk Name
Enter the trunk name.
Possible values: Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 External Ring Repeat
This option determines what ring signal is sent to telephones when a line rings the
telephone. Select CO Ring Repeat ("Supplied" in older versions of software) to use
the ring signal supplied by the CO or Centrex line. Select CTX Ring ("Not Supplied"
in older versions of software) to use the standard ring signal supplied by the CTX.
Important! CTX Ring must be used on all DISA lines for proper ringing operation.
Possible values: CO Ring Repeat (default), CTX Ring
11 DTMF Back Tone
Select DTMF Back Tone type.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
12 Hunt Order
Change the trunk hunting order sequence for this Trunk.
Possible values: 1~264 or Last One (default = 1)
13 Immediate Cut-Through
This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be established
immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
Possible values: Enable, Disable (default)
CAUTION!
This option will bypass Destination Restriction and E911
digit analysis. Do not enable this option on a line where
these functions are required.
This option is available only on ground and loop, analog or T1 circuits. It should not
be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and QSIG lines.
Available with CTX R1.02, MA217 and above software.
14 CO Line Guard Time
The interval between the release of a CO line and its eligibility to be seized again.
6-8
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
313 Caller ID
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS,
DID formats for TI and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.
1. Complete the "Caller ID
Assignment Record Sheet" on
page D-24.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, the click the
Caller ID tab. The Trunk Caller ID
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number in Trunk
Index for an existing record or click
one of the following buttons:
·
List to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
·
Copy Enter the Trunk Number
in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new Caller ID trunk numbers.
4. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Trunk Number
Enter the Trunk Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CTX100), 1~96 (CTX670 Basic),
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Signaling Method
Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values: Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)
02 Signaling Contents
Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
Possible values: ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no
value).
03 CLASS Equipment No.
If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit. Enter
the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01(CTX100); 01~02 (CTX670 Basic); 01~07
(CTX670 Exp.)
yy = Slot 01~08 (CTX100); 01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~08
Notes
·
CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to a RCIU/
RCIS circuit.
·
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID circuit
Tr
to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a caller ID
unks
circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-9

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
308 Trunk Timer
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6
These commands assign Trunk timers.
1. Complete the "Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet" on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, then click the
Timer tab. The Trunk Timer and
DIT Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment number
field. Enter Program 308 data.
·
List to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks timers.
·
Copy to copy to trunk timer
ports.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line No.
Enter the trunk equipment number.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or
zz = T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~24 (CTX100)
(default = no value)
Note
Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It
can also be used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.
01 Auto Release
Select the Automatic Release timing.
Possible values: Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)
Note
Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release signal to the loop
start trunk.
02 Short Flash
Select Short Flash Time
Possible values: 0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5, which is .5 seconds)
0 = no flash, 1 = .1 sec., 2 = .2 sec. 15=1.5 sec. 5 is the most
common duration of a hook flash signal
When a telephone initiates the short flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the short Flash feature button or access code #450) the duration of a short flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hook flash a centrex line.
The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds.
03 Long Flash
Select Long Flash Time.
Possible values: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = .5 seconds. (default = 5)
When a telephone initiates the long flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the Long Flash feature button or access code #451) the duration of a long flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line. The
long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. Possible values: 0=no
flash, 5=.5 sec., 10=1sec. 15=1.5 sec., 20=2 sec., 25=2.5 sec., 30=3 sec.
6-10
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Pause after Flash
Pause time after flash: After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this timer determines
when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = immediately sent, and 1sec.delay to 5sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay before sending digits)
05 Response
The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the "start method" set for
Information
"Timing" in Prg300-06. After a line is seized this timer determines when the line will start
to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0=immediatly sent, and 50msec.delay to 500msec.delay
(default = 500mseconds delay before sending digits)
06 Call Abandon Timer
The interval after which the CTX stops sending ring tone to stations when an incoming
call is abanboned (caller hangs up before the call is answered).
310 DIT Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6
This program assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are ground and loop start
trunks.
1. Complete the "Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet" on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, then click the
DIT tab. The DIT Assignments
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment number
field. Enter Program 310 data.
·
List to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks timers.
·
Copy to copy to trunk timer
ports.
4. Click Submit.
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-11

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line No.
Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3,
enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01~07; yy =slot 01~10; zz = circuit 01~08 or Channel
01~24 (CTX670).
xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 01~08; zz = circuit 01~24 or Channel
(CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX28 equipment assignments are fixed. See Program 100.
·
CTX100 Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX28 equipment assignments are fixed. See Program 100.
·
CTX100 Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
01 Day1 Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values: : No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
03 Night Destination Type
Bell
·
No Data no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
·
Dialing Digits assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the "Destination Digits" assignment
·
DSIA assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
·
Modem assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.
·
Night Bell Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
Day1 Destination Digits
Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only if Dialing Digits
Day2 Destination Digits
is selected as Destination Type.
Night Destination Digits
·
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring.If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is
the external Page group number.
·
If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access
code as the leading digits.
·
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
04 MOH Source
Select the MOH source for Analog DIT Trunk. The Scroll key must be used to select
MOH sources indicated by 10 or higher.
Possible values: External1~15 (default = External1)
6-12
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
309 Direct Inward Dialing
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.
1. Complete the "DID Assignment
Record Sheet" on page D-25.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > DID. The Trunk DID
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Select an ILG Number.
4. Enter a DID Number in the 01 DID
Number field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a list of programmed
DIDs.
·
Create Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
·
Copy Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID assignment
with settings copied from the DID Number entered.
·
Delete Delete a DID.
5. Enter DID Assignment data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ILG Group Number
Select the ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = no value)
01 DID Number
Enter a DID number.
Possible values: 1~7 digits may include wild card "?" where "?" = 0~9 (default = no
value).
02 MOH Source
Set Music On Hold for Analog ISDN DID Trunk
Possible values: Quiet Tone or External 1~15 (default = External 1)
03 GCO Key Group
GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670
Exp), (default = 0)
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-13

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Pool Key Group
If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO or a Pooled line key, enter the
Destination type that should ring:
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in
the 'Destination Digits' assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to the
caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a WinAdmin PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)..
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670
Exp),
(default = 0)
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO or a Pooled line key, enter the
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Destination type that should ring:
07 Audio Night Dst Type
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in
the 'Destination Digits' assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to the
caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a WinAdmin PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open).
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
Audio Day1 Destination
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Audio Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Audio Night Destination
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for data calls
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
10 Data Night Dst Type
Data Day1 Destination
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Data Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Data Night Destination
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.
6-14
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
11 DNIS VMID Code
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This
code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set in
Program 309, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed; therefore, if
using Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded DID\DNIS
calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DNIS Name
Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
VMID
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9 (seconds),
up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if the
CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
16 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values: 1~8.
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-15

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
318 DID Intercept Assignments
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 304 page 6-2
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.
1. Complete the "DID Intercept
Assignment Record Sheet" on
page D-26.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > DID Intercept.The DID
Intercept Assignments screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG Number
...or click List to view a summary
list of programmed ILGs.
4. Enter DID Type in the 01 Type field.
5. Enter DID Intercept Assignment
data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ILG Number
Enter ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = no value
01 Type
No DID, set destination that should ring when the DID number received does not
match DID numbers in this group's DID table.
Not Determined, set the destination that should ring when the normal programmed
ringing destination is disconnected.
Possible values: No DID (default) or Not Determined
02 MOH Source
Select Music On Hold
Possible values: External 1~15 (default = External 1)
03 Group CO Destination
GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
04 Pooled Line Group
POOL Line Key Group Number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
6-16
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Bell
·
No Data no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
·
Dialing Digits assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the "Destination Digits" assignment
·
DSIA assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
·
Modem assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.
·
Night Bell Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
Audio Day1 Dst. DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
Audio Day2 Dst DN
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Audio Night Dst DN
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
Select the data call Day1 destination type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
10 Data Night Dst Type
Bell
·
No Data no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
·
Dialing Digits assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the "Destination Digits" assignment
·
DSIA assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
·
Modem assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.
·
Night Bell Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
Data Day1 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
Data Day2 Dst DN
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Data Night Dst DN
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value).
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01.
This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set
in Program 318, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed;
therefore, if using Program 318, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number, or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
Trunks
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-17

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
12 DID/DNIS Name
Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
VMID
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
6-18
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
Service
Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319
These commands assign Assigns Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Service. The Trunk
Services screen displays (shown
right).
2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Click Submit.
311 DISA Security Code
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DISA parameters.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 DISA Enabled
Enable DISA security code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 DISA Code
Enter DISA security code. Only required if DISA Security Code is marked as
necessary.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
03 Response Timer
Choose the time, in seconds, the CTX will wait before answering an incoming DISA
call.
Possible values: 0~30 (default = 5)
04 Idle Timer
Choose the time, in seconds, the CTX will wait for the first DTMF tones after
answering a DISA call.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 10)
05 Tie Line Access
Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when they call into the
system. (This feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-19

Trunks
315 T1 Trunk Card
319 Intercept Treatment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CTX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions are
used when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations should be
assigned.
Possible values: 1~8.
01 Day1 Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values: None (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
03 Night Destination Type
Day1 Destination
Enter Destination for each.
Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Night Destination
·
To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
·
To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
·
To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
315 T1 Trunk Card
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
1. Complete the "Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet" on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > T1. The T1 Trunk Card
Data Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter T1 card location in Shelf/Slot
field (xxyy). The selected slot
requires a DTU Card.
·
xx = Cabinet 01~07
·
yy = Slot 01~10
...or click the following buttons:
·
List to view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
·
Copy to T1 trunk equipment.
4. Enter values for Program 315.
5. Click Submit.
6-20
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
DID/DNIS Table View
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
T1 Equipment
Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location.
Location
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~07
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08 or ZZ=T1channel 01~24.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
01 Coding Format
Select the Coding Format.
Possible values: None, PZC, B8ZS (default) or ZCS
02 Frame Format
Select the Frame Format.
Possible values: SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)
04 Receive PAD
Select the Receive PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
05 Send PAD
Select the Send PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
DID/DNIS Table View
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This screen provides the DID/DNIS Table View on the DID command page.
Important!
To avoid any errors, you must first set the digit length under Trunk > ILG.
¥ To access DID/DNIS table
view
¥ Click Trunk > DID/DNIS
Table View...or use Program
309.
See "Table Views" on page 2-8
for table functionality.
Note You can navigate this
table using the ILG and
T
the DID/DNIS which are
runks
the first and second drop-
downs between the
Previous and Next
buttons.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-21

Trunks
ISDN
ISDN
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
The following program enables set up for ISDN related system settings.
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
1. This command assigns ISDN BRI
Trunks.
1. Complete the "ISDN BRI Station
Record Sheets" on page D-19. From
the Program Menu, click Trunk >
ISDN > BRI.
2. Enter Channel Group number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
·
Create Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
·
Copy Enter a Channel Group
number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings copied from the Channel
Group you entered.
·
Delete Delete an Trunk.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX28 & CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = no value)
01 Equipment Number
Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301 for circuit 1.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or 01~24
(CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~04 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX100 Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX100 Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
6-22
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Protocol
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set
in the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat'l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat'l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
03 ILG
ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being received.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value).
04 OLG
OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
originated.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value).
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
Enable speech capability. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table" on page 24.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table" on page 24.
Audio
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table" on page 24.
Audio
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
09 Bearer Svc -
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table"
Unrestricted 64K
on page 24.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel
10 Bearer Svc -
group.
Unrestricted 56K
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K
12 Outgoing B Ch Select
Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
·
Explicit Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
·
Preferred (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
·
Any Channel Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
13 B Ch Selection
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)
·
Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).
·
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).
·
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
Trunks
14 Initialize Type
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values: User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto SPID
or None (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-23

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Initialization Display
Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)
16 SPID #1
Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously entered information is overwritten.
17 SPID #2
Possible values: Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)
18 T-Wait Timer
Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in Protocol
above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing SPID times to
prevent BRI interfaces from re-initialize at the same time after a reset or power
outage.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
19 Voice Calls
Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same
time on this interface.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be consistent
with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously programmed
information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this field
any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
22 Layer 1 Short Break
If layer 1 is interrupted for a short period of time CTX will ignore it
Tolerant
23 TEI assignment
TEI assignment for ISDN CO Trunk
Leave in default
Possible values: TEI FIXED, SINGLE TEI or 3:TWO TEI (default)
24 Malicious Call ID
Enable - to be allow Malicious Call ID to be sent by this terminal.
Disable - to not allow Malicious Call ID to be sent on this terminal.(also see Program
302-31)
Note: MCID supplementry service must be provided by PSTN for this feature to
operate.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Table 6-1
Bearer Capability Table
Bellcore
Bearer Services
ETSI
TTC
National ISDN
Speech
X
X
X
3.1 KHz
X
X
X
7 KHz
X
X
64 Kbps
X
X
X
Circuit Mode
Rate adaptation
Unrestricted
X
from 56 Kbps
Digital
Information
2x64 Kbps
X
X
6-24
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
ISDN
302 PRI and IP QSIG
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
The PRI (RPTU, BPTU) and IP QSIG (BIPU-Q) interface cards need to have a number of assignments for
defining its operation. These include assigning which channels are available for use and the location of the
D-channel or signaling channel. The D-channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command. Also, a
number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
For BIPU-Q channel groups, parameters 01~04 must be configured, all other parameters should remain at
default. All parameters should be configured for ISDN. Many of these are normally set to default.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using "Call-by-Call" on page 6-29. Therefore, ILG and OLG must
be set to 0.
1. Complete the "PRI Trunks
Record Sheet" on page D-29.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > PRI.
3. Enter Channel Group number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
List View a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
·
Create Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
·
Copy Enter an Channel
Group number and click
Copy to make a new Trunk
assignment with settings
copied from the Channel
Group entered.
5722
·
Delete Delete an Trunk
(Trunks 1~128 for CTX670 and 1~32 for CTX100).
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number.
Assign the proper PAD levels to channel groups in Programs 107, 108 and 114.
These levels are critical for ISDN and IP QSIG speech levels, as well as Quality Of
Service.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-25

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 RPTU Equipment No.
Enter the ISDN RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q equipment number as xxyyzz.
XX=cabinet 01~07
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=T1channel 01~24. (default = no value)
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Note
zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q
parameters
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301. Enter the
equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the
system. They can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU
PCBs.
02 Protocol
The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon the
equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
In North America, the choices are 1-Bellcore National ISDN; 4-Bellcore National
ISDN NT; or 5-Q-Sig.
Use IP for BIUP-Q, IP Qsig.
Use QSIG for RPTU/BPTU, PRI Qsig
Possible values: National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or Q-Sig
(default = None)
03 ILG
ISDN and IP Qsig need to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls
being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
04 OLG
ISDN and IP Qsig needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls
being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
05 Trunk ID Type
Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier.
Possible values: Implicit (default) or Explicit
06 Trunk ID
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an "explicit" identified is
used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for the
given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
Possible values: 0 ~ 126 (default = 0)
6-26
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
07 D Ch Position
PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the
channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note
This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the span
interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
Possible values: 0 ~ 24 (default = 24)
08~13 Bearer Services:
1. Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.
·
Speech
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
·
3.1 KHz Audio
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
·
7 KHz Audio
Note
In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel Number).
·
Unrestr. 64K
See Table 6-2.
·
Unrestr. 56K
Possible values: Channel Number (default) or Slot Number
·
Unrestr. 2x64K
14~18 Bearer Services:
1. The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k Unrestricted(H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
·
Unrestr. 384K
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.
·
Unrestr. 1536K
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
·
Unrestr. 1920K
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
·
Restr. Digital
Note
In North America, only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-2.
·
Video
Possible values: Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
Slot Map H
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11), 1920k
Unrestricted
Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted Multirate are not
used and should remain disabled. See Table 6-2.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 B Ch Selection Method
The method used for selecting an idle `B' channel and the reaction if the PSTN
indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CTX.
Possible values: Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.
21 B-Ch Selection
The search method for choosing an idle `B' channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or
Backward Terminal (default)
22 T1 Time Slot Pattern
1544 Time Slot Pattern.
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating
23 E1 Time Slot Pattern
2048 Time Slot Pattern
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible
Trunks
24 T-Wait Timer
Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only
valid for Nat'l ISDN. This should not be enabled for PRI, it is for BRI.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-27

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
25 RBT on Incoming Call
Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat'l
ISDN.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Network Mode
Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates. This governs call
setup activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values: Master (default) or Slave
27 Negotiation Priority
Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates.
Possible values: Side A (default) or Side B
28 Layer 1 Short Break
If layer 1 is interrupted for less than 90 seconds. CTX will keep the current calls
Tolerant
open. (This feature is available with Strata CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G0 or higher.)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
29 2-B channel Transfer
Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This allows to PRI
channels to be connected in the same conference or Tandem call.
Note
This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it to work.
30 Q931 Protocol Timer
Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Table 6-2
Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services
Nat'l ISDN
ETSI
TTC
Speech
X
X
X
3.1 KHz Audio
X
X
X
7 KHz Audio
X
X
unrestricted digital
64 kbps
X
X
X
information
Rate adaptation from 56
X
kbps
Circuit
2x64
X
X
Mode
384kbp (H0)
X
X
X
1536kbps (H11)
X
X
X
1920kbps (H12)
X
multirate (n x 64 kbps)
X
Restricted digital Information
X
X
Video
X
X
Packet
Shelf/Slot/Circuit
Mode
6-28
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
ISDN
Call-by-Call
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 324 and 323
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements of
different facilities vary at different times, and sharing B channels on a Call-by-Call basis makes it possible
to use fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.
1. Complete the "324 CBC Time
Zones" on page 6-30.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > Call by Call. The
ISDN Call by Call Service screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter Channel Group number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.
323 CBC Service
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share the PRI channel group. Since the traffic
requirements of each facility may vary at different times, it becomes possible to use fewer `B' channels to
perform the equivalent services of the discrete counterpart. This sharing the `B' channels on a call-by-call
basis can save the user money. To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related
Line Group assigned and minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service
parameters may be set for three different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different
types at different times of the day. Complete the "Call-by-Call Record Sheet" on page D-30.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Enter the Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Index
Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:
·
List view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
·
Create Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
02 Type of Service
Select the CBC Service Type.
Trunks
Note
To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.
Possible values: No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut through),
Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA Out WATS or
INWATS
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-29

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 Facility Code
Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this field,
any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 00~31(default = no value)
04 Service Parameter
Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field, any
previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
05 Network ID
Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
"Inter LATA Out WATS" Type of Service. If no data is entered in this field, any previously
entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 3 to 4 digits (default = no value)
06 ILG
Specify the ILG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
07 OLG
Specify the OLG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
08 Min Calls Zone 1
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
09 Max Calls Zone 1
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
10 Min Calls Zone 2
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
11 Max Calls Zone 2
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
12 Min Calls Zone 3
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
13 Max Calls Zone 3
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
324 CBC Time Zones
This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Start Zone 1
Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).
Possible values: hh = 00~23, 99 (hour)
02 Start Zone 2
mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes)
03 Start Zone 3
9999 = delete time zone, (default = no value)
6-30
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
ISDN
320 B Channel
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The B channel assignments allow for a
flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the PSTN.
1. Complete the "B Channel Select
Record Sheet" on page D-31.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > B Channel. The
ISDN B-Channel Assignments
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Equipment Number, or
click List to see a summary of
progammed circuits.
4. Click the B Channel numbers that
you want to activate (see Table 6-3
below for T1 and E1 B Channel
default settings).
5. Click Submit.
Table 6-3
B Channel Defaults
B Channel Position
01~15
16
17~23
24
25~31
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1)
ON
ON
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
2.0M (E1)
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
ON
ON
ON
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-31

Trunks
ISDN
316 Shared D Channel
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of
channels to 47 on a Channel Group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
1. Complete the "Shared D Channel
Record Sheet" on page D-32.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > D Channel. The
Share D Channel Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Channel Group number
(1~128, default = no value), or click
the List button to view a summary
list of programmed Channel
Groups.
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Equipment Number
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01, yy = 03, 05, or 07 and zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU parameters
...or xx = Cabinet 02~10, yy = 01, 03, or 05 and zz = Channel 01 is
always used to assign RPTU parameters
(default = no value)
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the system.
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
02 Channel ID
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN
which channel on which link is used the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.
Possible values: 1~ 126 (default = 1)
03 D-Ch Provided
If a backup `D' Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.
Possible values: D-channel or No D-channel (default)
04 Backup D-Ch
The channel position within the 24 channels must be identified to be used for the `D'
Position
channel signaling.
Possible values: 1~24
6-32
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
ISDN
Calling Number
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 321 and 322
When calls are made using ISDN services, the telephone number for which the call originates must be
identified to the PSTN.
1. Complete the "Calling Number
Record Sheets" on page D-33.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > Calling Number.
The ISDN Calling Number
Identification screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter the OLG Number, or click the
List button to view a summary list
of programmed OLGs.
4. Enter Program 321 data.
5. Enter Program 322 data.
6. Click Submit.
321 Calling Number Identification
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-4
The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling Number. This number may be
optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
OLG Number
Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Default Number
Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the
number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Number Prefix
Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to create a
User Identified telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the distant
end and could be used for returning your call.
03 Number Verification
Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the call is
to proceed.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Tr
04 Default Number 2
Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
unks
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second
number is for BRI only
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-33

Trunks
ISDN
322 Called Number Table
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-4
When calls are received from the PSTN, a Called Number is supplied as part of the Setup Message. This
Called Number may be used for directing the call to the appropriate service with Strata CTX.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
OLG Number
OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Source Type
Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3- Pooled Line.
Possible values: Primary DN (0~99999), Group CO (1~128) or Pool Line Group
(1~128); (default = no value)
02 Source Number
Specify the number of the source type selected (PDN, GCO or Pooled Line).
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
03 DID Number
Specify the number to be sent when calling out from the source (max. seven digits). This
number is appended to Program 321 FB02
Possible values: Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note
Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a DID number can be
assigned.
6-34
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This wizard enables you to assign Direct Inward Dialing / Dialed Number Identification Service (DID/
DNIS) to ILGs quickly and easily. The wizard automatically takes you through the different programs and
parameters required.
Follow the steps below to start using the DID/DNIS Wizard.
Step 1: Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG
1. Select Trunk > Setup Wizard >
DID/DNIS.
2. After reading the instructions on
the screen (shown right), click
Start.
Step 1: 304 Select or Create DID/
DNIS ILG screen displays (shown
right).
3. In the 00 DID/DNIS Incoming Line
Group (ILG) field, click Create
...or from the drop-down menu,
select a DID/DNIS ILG to edit.
Note Only DID/DNIS ILGs appear in
the drop-down box.
See table below for screen fields
and field descriptions.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 ILG Type
Select analog for RDDU or RDTU interface, or ISDN for RPTU interface.
11 DID/DNIS Digit Length
Select the number of digits (1~7) that compose each DID number for this DID/DNIS
ILG. This is the number of DID digits sent from the CO on incoming DID/DNIS. If ANI
digits are sent with DID digits, only set this parameter for the quantity of DID digits
sent.
T
02 Line Type
DID lines should always be set as CO type lines.
runks
03 DID/DIT Service
DID lines should always be set as DID service
04 Std/Q-SIG Service
DID lines should always be set for "Standard" service
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-35

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
4. If you clicked Create in Step 3, the Create New
DID/DNIS ILG screen displays (shown at right).
Fill in the three fields on the screen and click Create Now. The
DID/DNIS Number Range Wizard screen displays with the
new information.
5. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/
DNIS assignments. This table displays assignments for all
DID/DNIS ILGs currently programmed in the CTX. For more
details, see "DID/DNIS Table View" on page 6-21.
6. After creating or selecting a DID/DNIS ILG, click Next.
Step 2: Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2
1. From the Step 2: 309 Create or Delete DID/DNIS
Numbers for ILG 2 screen (shown right), click
Create to create a block of DID/DNIS numbers.
The numbers are created in consecutive order.
The Create DID/DNIS Numbers screen displays (shown
right).
·
Specify the first number in the DID/DNIS block.
Note The quantity of digits must match the quantity of digits
assigned to the selected ILG (refer back to "DID/DNIS
Digit Length" on the previous screen).
·
Specify the DID/DNIS Number block size that should be
created. This is the quantity of DID/DNIS numbers
ordered from the DID/DNIS provider.
·
Specify "overwrite existing" or "add to existing" DID/
DNIS numbers. If no DID/DNIS numbers exist, add or
overwrite is OK.
...or click Delete and the delete DID/DNIS number dialog box
displays (shown right). Specify the first and last DID/DNIS
number to delete using the drop-down boxes; or, check mark
Delete all DID/DNIS numbers. Click Delete Now. The
numbers are deleted.
CAUTION!
Overwrite erases all existing DID/DNIS numbers currently programmed for the
selected ILG.
6-36
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
"DID/DNIS Table View" on page 6-21.
3. When finished, click Next.
Step 3: Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2
1. From the Step 3: 309 Assign DID/DNIS Number
Audio Destinations for ILG 2 screen (shown right),
set the DID/DNIS Number range.
Note This step enables you to assign the ringing
destinations for all DID/DNIS numbers in the
selected ILG. This assignment applies only to
Voice (audio) calls--not to data calls.
2. Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which
ringing assignments should be made. Use the First
Number/Last Number drop-down arrows.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields on this screen (see
field descriptions below).
4. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
"DID/DNIS Table View" on page 6-21.
5. After selecting DID/DNIS ringing destination assignments, click Submit to register them in the CTX
database.
6. After creating DID/DNIS ringing destinations, click Next to assign DID/DNIS Voice Mail ID codes.
These VM codes are optional and are only used if DID/DNIS numbers have unique VM boxes to "call
forward to" or "ring directly to".
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
GCO Key Group
If a Group CO Key is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on telephones
that have this key.
Note
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
Pool Key Group
If a Pool Key Group is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on
telephones that have this key.
Note
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
Set for Period
DID/DNIS ringing assignments can be unique for each CTX time period: Day, Day2
and Night. Select the period(s) in which the destinations should ring. Then select the
destination type.
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-37

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Destination Type
Select the type of destination:
DISA - to call in and receive DISA dial tone.
Built-in modem - to call in directly to the CTX modem with CTX WinAdmin.
Night Bell - to call in and close the BIOU or ACTU night bell control relay.
Dialing Digits - to call in and:
·
Ring PDNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot Numbers
·
Night Ring over External Page - feature access code must be included in the
dialing digits.
·
Access outgoing CO lines, Network Nodes and/or LCR to set up tandem calls -
line access codes must be included in the dialing digits.
Notes
·
When Dialing Digits is the selected Destination Type, you must set the Dialing
Digit Range below.
·
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in this
Program or Program 304, ILG assignments.
Set the Dialing Digits
Select the method in which dialing digit ringing destinations should be created:
range
Use DNIS as Destination - the destination digits for each DID/DNIS number will be the
same as the DID/DNIS number. This option is normally used when the DID/DNIS
numbers match the telephone PDNs, PhDNs etc.
Start with - enter the number to which the first selected DID/DNIS number should ring.
Ringing destinations will be assigned consecutively, starting with this number, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the dialing digits
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each dialing digit number.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each dialing digit number.
6-38
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS VMID Codes for ILG
1. From the Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS
Number VMID Codes for ILG 2
screen, assign VMID codes for all
DID/DNIS numbers in the selected
ILG. See field descriptions below.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table
View to view existing DID/DNIS
assignments. For more details,
see "DID/DNIS Table View" on page
6-21.
3. After selecting VMID code
assignments, click Submit to register
them in the CTX database.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Set for DID/DNIS Number
Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which VMID code assignments should
range:
be made. Use the First Number/Last Number drop down arrows.
Set for:
The codes can be set independently for DTMF in band or SMDI Voice Mail
integration.
DTMF VMID
Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF voice mail integration.
SMDI VMID
Select to set VMID code assignments for SMDI voice mail integration.
All
Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF and SMDI voice mail integration.
Note
DTMF and SMDI Voice Mail integration will not function simultaneously on
CTX.
Set the VMID range
Select the method in which VMID codes should be created:
Use DNIS as VMID - the VMID code for each DID/DNIS number will be the same as
the DID/DNIS number.
Start with - enter the VMID that should be assigned to the first selected DID/DNIS
number. VMID codes will be assigned consecutively, starting with this code, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the VMID code
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each VMID code.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each VMID code.
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
6-39

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
6-40
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Attendant
7
At
tendant
This chapter provides programming information for Strata CTX Attendants.
404 Attendant Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.
1. Complete the "Attendant Group
Record Sheet" on page D-34.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Attendant > Group Assignment.
The Attendant Group Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the Attendant Group
Member.
...or click one of the following
buttons.
·
List to view data list window.
·
Copy to Attendant group
numbers.
4. Enter Program 404 data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Attendant Group
Select the Attendant Group Member Number.
Member
Possible values: 1(CTX100 & CTX670 Basic), 1~8 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = no value)
01 Call Distribution Method
Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
Possible values: Most Idle First (default), Next Available First or Broadcast
02 Alternate Destination
Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot Number).
If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
03 Overflow Time
Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
7-1

Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Group Overflow
Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered in this
Destination
field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the Attendant's Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field, any
previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
07 ICI1~16 ICI10
For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.
·
ILG1
·
Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
·
ILG2
·
Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
·
ILG3
·
Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
·
ILG4
·
Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note
Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
7-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
At
te
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group for
ndant
each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
1. From the Program Menu, click
Attendant > Emergency Call. The
Emergency Call screen displays
(shown right).
2. Enter Program 400 data.
...or click one of the following
buttons:
·
Insert assigns the destination
for the selected index.
·
Modify assigns a new
destination to the selected
index.
·
Remove removes the
assigned destination from the
table.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Day/Night Mode
Select the time of day mode (Day1,Day2,Night) from the table below.
Possible values: Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)
02 Called Number Index
Emergency Call Group Number (1~4). The system will hunt through these in
numerical order to find an available emergency destination.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
03 Emergency Call
Enter the DN, Pilot Number or Private Number to be associated with the Called
Destination
Number Index.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
04 Action
Choose whether you are replacing an existing Emergency Number Index or
inserting one in the list. If inserting, the new entry will assume the specified
index. The remaining indices will be increased by one and the last one, 4, will
be deleted.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
7-3

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
7-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

IP Telephone Programming
8
All programs and features found in this chapter require CTX Release 2.0 software or higher and
Pr
WinAdmin Release 2.1 software or higher. This covers IP and 2B-channel conference programming. For
IP
ogr
T
CTX IP Telephone Programming guidelines, refer to Appendix A Applications, Tips and Tricks on
e
am
le
page A-1. IP Telephone Programming is not available with the CTX28.
pho
ming ne
150 System IP Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
This command assigns IP data to the system.
1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > System
IP Data. The Trunk System
IP data Assignment screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 150 data.
3. Click Submit.
6548
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Automatic Assignment
Enable Automatic Assignment of Station ID when the IPT has no station ID. In
of Station ID
program 250, FB04 is the same parameter and is per terminal.
When IPT searches to connect a CTX with no station ID, CTX looks for a PDN
which is set this parameter as "automatic", and sends the PDN to the IPT and
IPT sets it in the setting of IPT.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
8-1

IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Terminal
Enable this parameter if you want to reserve the PDNs on IP Telephones
Authentication
system wide.
When "enable" is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of IPT is valid.
So if another IPT with the same PDN is connected to the network, CTX rejects
the registration of this IPT because the MAC address of IPT is different.
When "disable" is set, you can move the PDN from a IPT to another IPT and
another IPT can be connected to the CTX.
In program 250 FB05 is the same parameter exists. Program 250 FB05, the
individual IPT setting will override this system wide setting.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
03 Diffserv
Enable Diffserv (Differentiated Services) priority control if voice packets on an
IP (internal) Network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority,
time-critical BIPU\IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other
traffic is running at best effort.
If Diffserv is enabled you must set the '04 TOS Field Type' as DSCP or TOS.
Note: Diffserv is usually not standard feature with most ISPs, contact your ISP
to make arrangements to provide Diffsrv or this feature will not work accurately.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 TOS Field Type
If '03 Diffserv' is enabled, select DSCP 'Differentiated Service Format' or TOS
'Type Of Service format'.
Then, if TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in '05 TOS Precedence
Type'.
Then, if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in '06 DSCP'.
Possible values: Tos (default) or Dscp
05 TOS Precedence Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a packet priority level - where
CRITIC/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority.
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' make selections in TOS Delay, TOS
Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Override, or
CriticEsp (default = 0)
TOS Delay Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or Low
TOS Throughput Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or High
TOS Reliability Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or High
06 DSCP
If DSCP is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a priority level from 1~ 64.
Level guidelines:
0,Best effort, default for most non-voice IP traffic.
24, Assured Flow 'AF' or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40, Expedited Flow 'EF' or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic.
Possible values: 0~63 (default = 0)
8-2
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
07 IEEE802.1p
Enable IEEE802.1p priority control if voice packets on an Ethernet LAN should
be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU\IPT voice
traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best
effort.
If you enable IEEE802.1p, select which priority level to use (Voice or Best
Effort) in '08 IEEE802.1p Configuration' on this screen.
Note
All Ethernet devices on the LAN (routers, switches, etc., must support
IEEE802.1p for this feature to work accurately.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Pr
IP
ogr
T
08 IEEE802.1p
If 07 IEEE802.1p is enabled, select 'Voice' priority. BIUP\IPT voice packets will
e
am
le
Configuration
be tagged with the highest priority level.
pho
m
Note
Best Effort is not recommended for VoIP.
ing
ne
Possible values: BestEffort or Voice (default)
09 IP-CTX Identifier
Enter a CTX Node ID if more than one CTX Node is on the IP Network. This
can be the same as the Qsig Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a
CTX Qsig. Network - but the two IDs are not related in software logic.
This ID must match the Node 'number' programmed in the IP telephone using
369Hold-2, FB06
Possible values: Up to 5 digits
10 Tail length of Echo
Enter the length for echo cancellation. To lessen the echo, select 32MS.
Canceller
Possible values: 16 msec (default) or 32 msec.
11 BIPU/IPT VQ Mode
Set the Voice Quality Mode to control the Gain of IPT and BIPU to the
appropriate level in the existing system environment. This may require some
trial and error testing to find the optimum level.
Possible values: high (default), middle or low
Table 8-1
Program 250 FB05 and Program 150 FB02 Combination Matrix
Program 250 FB05
Enable
Disable
Don't Care
Program 150
Enable
Apply
Not Apply
Apply
FB02
Disable
Apply
Not Apply
Not Apply
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04
8-3

IP Telephone Programming
151 BIPU Configuration
151 BIPU Configuration
This program is used to set up the IP address of the specific BIPU card to support the IP-Telephone. BIPU
card must be assigned before configuring the specific BIPU card.
1. From the Program Menu, click IP-
Telephone > BIPU Configuration.
The BIPU Configuration screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 151 data.
3. Click Submit.
6550

FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Cabinet & Slot Number
Enter the cabinet and slot number of the BIPU to be configured.
Note: BIPUs must first be installed using PRG100 - System\Card
Assignment.
BIPUs can be installed in the slots listed:
Possible values: Slots 01-08 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic), 01-06
(CTX670 Exp).
IP Address
Enter the BIPU IP Address.
Subnet Address
Enter the Subnet Address of the BIPU.
Default Gateway Address
Enter the Default Gateway Address of the BIPU card.
Version Number of BIPU
This is a read-only field.
8-4
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 6/04

IP Telephone Programming
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
This program assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.
1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > Voice
Packet Configuration. The
Voice Packet
Configuration Table
Assignment screen
displays (shown right)
Pr
Select Voice Packet Table
I
2. Enter Program 152 data.
P
ogr
T
Number 1 or 2. The default
e
3. Click Submit.
values will appear in the fields.
am
lepho
ming ne
6719
Important!
·
When setting Voice Packet Configuration Tables on an IP QSIG network, the packet table settings
for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
·
Whenever Voice Packet Configuration Table changes are made for IP telephones on IP QSIG nodes,
Toshiba recommends pressing the reset button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Voice Packet Table
Enter the Voice Packet Configuration Table Number (